Lexmark 6500E Mfp Option Owner S Manual User's Guide

2014-07-06

: Lexmark Lexmark-Lexmark-6500E-Mfp-Option-Owner-S-Manual lexmark-lexmark-6500e-mfp-option-owner-s-manual lexmark pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 337

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

6500e
User's Guide

November 2012
Machine type(s):
4036
Model(s):
310

www.lexmark.com

Contents

Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Basic functions of the scanner...................................................................................................................9
Finding information about the scanner.....................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer and the scanner...............................................................................10
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................11
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass..............................................................................................12
Understanding the scanner control panel...............................................................................................13

Understanding the home screen................................................................14
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................14
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................15

Customizing the home screen.....................................................................19
Finding the IP address of the scanner.....................................................................................................19
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................19
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................20
Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded Web Server...........................................22

Additional printer setup.............................................................................23
Installing a scanner communications card in the printer........................................................................23
Installing internal options in the scanner................................................................................................27
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................42
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................44
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................45
Setting up the scanner software.............................................................................................................46
Setting up wireless printing.....................................................................................................................48
Preparing to set up the scanner on an Ethernet network.......................................................................54
Installing the scanner on an Ethernet network.......................................................................................55
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port......................................57
Setting up serial printing.........................................................................................................................59

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact........................................62
Saving paper and toner...........................................................................................................................62

Contents

Saving energy..........................................................................................................................................63
Recycling..................................................................................................................................................65

Loading paper and specialty media............................................................67
Loading paper..........................................................................................................................................67
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................78
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................80
Setting the ADF to detect multiple paper feeds......................................................................................80
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................80

Paper and specialty media guidelines.........................................................82
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................82
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................85

Printing......................................................................................................90
Printing a document................................................................................................................................90
Printing from a flash drive.......................................................................................................................91
Printing on specialty media.....................................................................................................................93
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................95
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................96
Adjusting toner darkness.........................................................................................................................97
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................97

Copying......................................................................................................99
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................99
Copying film photos..............................................................................................................................100
Copying on specialty media...................................................................................................................100
Customizing copy settings.....................................................................................................................101
Placing information on copies...............................................................................................................106
Canceling a copy job..............................................................................................................................107
Understanding the copy screens and options.......................................................................................107

E-mailing..................................................................................................111
Getting ready to e-mail.........................................................................................................................111
Creating an e-mail shortcut...................................................................................................................112
E-mailing a document............................................................................................................................113
Customizing e-mail settings...................................................................................................................114
Canceling an e-mail...............................................................................................................................115

Contents

Understanding e-mail options...............................................................................................................115

Faxing......................................................................................................118
Getting the scanner ready to fax...........................................................................................................118
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................123
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................124
Using shortcuts and the address book..................................................................................................126
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................127
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................128
Understanding fax options....................................................................................................................129
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................131

Scanning to an FTP address......................................................................133
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................133
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................134
Understanding FTP options...................................................................................................................135

Scanning to a computer or flash drive......................................................138
Scanning to a computer........................................................................................................................138
Scanning to a flash drive........................................................................................................................139
Understanding the Scan Center features..............................................................................................139
Using the ScanBack Utility.....................................................................................................................140
Understanding scan profile options......................................................................................................140

Understanding printer menus...................................................................143
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................143
Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................144
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................144
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................158
Network/Ports menu.............................................................................................................................159
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................172
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................179
Help menu.............................................................................................................................................229

Maintaining the scanner...........................................................................231
Cleaning the exterior of the scanner.....................................................................................................231
Cleaning the scanner glass....................................................................................................................231
Cleaning the ADF glass..........................................................................................................................232

Contents

Cleaning the ADF parts..........................................................................................................................232
Cleaning the touch screen.....................................................................................................................236
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................236
Checking the status of supplies.............................................................................................................237
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................237
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................241
Securing the memory before moving the scanner................................................................................242
Moving the scanner...............................................................................................................................244

Administrative support............................................................................246
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................246
Checking the status of the scanner.......................................................................................................246
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................246
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................246
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................247
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................247

Clearing jams............................................................................................248
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................248
Understanding jam numbers and locations..........................................................................................248
200–201 paper jams..............................................................................................................................249
202–203 paper jams..............................................................................................................................250
230 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................252
231–239 paper jams..............................................................................................................................254
24x paper jam........................................................................................................................................256
250 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................257
260 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................258
281 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................259
283 paper jam.......................................................................................................................................260
2yy.xx paper jams..................................................................................................................................261

Troubleshooting.......................................................................................262
The indicator light is blinking................................................................................................................262
Understanding printer messages..........................................................................................................262
Solving basic printer problems..............................................................................................................280
Solving printing problems.....................................................................................................................281
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................284

Contents

Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................287
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................289
Solving home screen applications problems.........................................................................................293
Solving option problems........................................................................................................................293
Solving paper feed problems.................................................................................................................296
Solving print quality problems..............................................................................................................298
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................310
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................311

Notices.....................................................................................................312
Product information..............................................................................................................................312
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................312
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................316

Index........................................................................................................328

Safety information

Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the scanner, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
scanner damage:

• Turn off the scanner using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the scanner before moving it.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or scanner damage:

• Make sure your fingers are not under the scanner when you set it down.
• Put the scanner on a flat and stable surface.
• Before setting up the scanner, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided
with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public
switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the scanner, then turn the scanner off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the scanner, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the scanner.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.

Safety information

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the scanner,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the scanner before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Learning about the printer

Learning about the printer
Basic functions of the scanner
When configured with the printer, the scanner provides copy, fax, and scan-to-network capability for large workgroups.
You can:

• Make quick copies, or change the settings on the touch screen to perform specific copy jobs.
• Send fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
• Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, a USB flash memory device, or an FTP
destination.

• Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF by way of FTP).
When the printer is converted into a multifunction device, all printer messages will be seen on the touch screen.

Finding information about the scanner
What are you looking for?

Find it here

Initial setup instructions:

Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the scanner and is also available on the Lexmark
Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

• Connecting the scanner to the printer
• Installing the scanner software
Additional setup and instructions for using the scanner:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
Loading paper
Configuring settings

User's Guide—The User's Guide is available on the
Software and Documentation CD.
For updates, check our Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.

Viewing and printing documents and photos
Setting up and using the scanner software
Configuring the scanner on a network (depending on the
model)

• Caring for and maintaining the scanner
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
Networking Guide—Open the Software and
Documentation CD that came with the scanner, and then
• Installing the scanner using Guided or Advanced wireless
look for Printer and Software Documentation under the
setup
Pubs folder. From the list of publications, click
• Connecting the scanner to an Ethernet or a wireless network Networking Guide.
• Troubleshooting scanner connection problems

Instructions for:

Learning about the printer

What are you looking for?

Find it here

Help using the scanner software

Windows or Mac Help—Open a scanner software
program or application, and then click Help.
Click ? to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:

• The Help installs automatically with the scanner
software.

• The scanner software is located in the device
Program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Latest supplemental information, updates, and technical support: Lexmark Support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
• Documentation

•
•
•
•

Driver downloads
Live chat support
E‑mail support
Telephone support

Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the Support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
scanner.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact support so they may serve you faster:

•
•
•
•
Warranty information

Machine Type number
Serial number
Date purchased
Store where purchased

Warranty information varies by country or region:

• In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this scanner, or at
http://support.lexmark.com.

• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.

Selecting a location for the printer and the scanner
When selecting a location for the printer and the scanner, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you
plan to install any options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:

• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.

• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer and the scanner:
– Within the distance allowed by the length of the Ethernet cable.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
– Free from direct sunlight, humidity extremes, or temperature fluctuations
– Clean, dry, and free of dust

Learning about the printer

• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer and the scanner for proper ventilation:

4
1

Right side

31 cm (12 in.)

Rear

2.5 cm (1 in.)

Left side

31 cm (12 in.)

Front

2.5 cm (1 in.)

Front

51 cm (20 in.)

Right side

2.5 cm (1 in.)

Rear

31 cm (12 in.)

Left side

36.8 cm (14.5 in.)

Top

137 cm (54 in.)

Top

55.9 cm (22 in.)

Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor‑mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high‑capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1

3
4

5
8

Scanner exit tray

Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Scanner cover

Standard exit bin

Learning about the printer

Standard paper tray

Scanner glass

Keypad

Scanner control panel

Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

Scanner glass

Use the ADF for multiple pages, including duplex pages.
Note: You may also load business cards into the ADF.
Use the scanner glass for single pages or book pages, small items
(such as business cards, postcards or photos), transparencies,
photo paper, or thin media such as magazine clippings.

Using the ADF
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Load letter‑ and A4‑size documents into the ADF facedown, long edge first.
Load legal‑ and A3‑size documents into the ADF facedown, short edge first.
Load up to 100 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
Load up to 30 sheets of A3‑, tabloid‑ or 11 x 17 in. size plain paper.
Scan sizes from 50.8 x 76.2 mm (2 x 3 in.) to 299.7 x 431.8 mm (11.8 x 17 in.).
Scan documents with different paper sizes (letter and legal).
Scan media weights of 52–120 g/m2 (12–34 lb).
Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

Using the scanner glass
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the lower left corner.
• Scan or copy documents up to 114 mm x 140 mm (4.5 x 5.5 in.) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 11 in.).
• Copy books with the book spine on the lower right corner of the scanner glass.

Learning about the printer

Understanding the scanner control panel
1

1 @!.

2 ABC

3 DEF

4 GHI

5 JKL

6 MNO

8 TUV

9 WXYZ

7 PQRS

5
6

Item

Description

Display

Indicator light

Sleep

Lets you view scanning, copying, faxing, and printing options as well as status and error messages

•
•
•
•

Off—The power is off.
Blinking green—The scanner is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green—The scanner is on, but idle.
Blinking red—Operator intervention is needed.

Enables Sleep mode
The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:

• Entering or waking from Sleep mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button
is unilluminated.

• Operating in Sleep mode—The indicator light is illuminated solid green, Sleep button is
illuminated solid amber.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:

•
•
•
•

Touching the screen or pressing any button
Opening an input tray, cover, or door
Sending a print job from the computer
Performing a power‑on‑reset with the main power switch

Keypad

Lets you enter numbers, letters, or symbols on the display

USB port

Lets you insert a USB flash drive to send data or to save scanned images.
For instructions on how to use the USB port, see “Printing from a flash drive” on page 91.

Submit

Lets you submit changes made in the scanner settings

Stop/Cancel

Stops all scanner activity
Note: A list of options is displayed once Stopped appears on the display.

Home

Lets you navigate back to the home screen

Understanding the home screen

Understanding the home screen
Understanding the home screen
When the scanner is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home
screen icons or buttons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond
to messages.
Note: Icons and buttons appearing on the home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization
settings, administrative setup, and active embedded applications.

Touch

Copy

Open the Copy menus.

E-mail

Open the E-mail menus.

Fax

Open the Fax menus.
Open the scanner menus. These menus are available only when the scanner is in Ready state.

FTP

Open the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus.

Status message bar

• Show the current status such as Ready or Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the scanner and printer can continue processing.

Status/Supplies

• Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.

• Access the messages screen for more information.
USB

Display the files on a USB drive.

Bookmarks

Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.

Held Jobs

Display all current held jobs.

Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:

Understanding the home screen

Touch this

Release Held Fax

Access the list of held faxes.
This button appears only when there are scheduled held faxes.

Lock Device

Enter the correct password to lock the scanner control panel.
This button appears when the scanner is unlocked and password has
been set.

Unlock Device

Enter the correct password to unlock the scanner control panel.
This button appears when the scanner is locked.

Cancel Jobs

Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.
The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network
headings:

•
•
•
•
•

Print job
Copy job
Fax profile
FTP
E-mail send

Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can
show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a
column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Change Language

Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that allows you to change
the primary language of the scanner.

Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your screens and buttons may vary depending on your options and administrative setup.

Understanding the home screen

Sample touch screen

Button

Function

Submit

Submits changes made in the printer settings

Sample Copy

Prints a sample copy

Right arrow

Scrolls to the right

Left arrow

Scrolls to the left

Home

Returns to the home screen

Right increase Lets you select a higher value

Left decrease Lets you select a lower value

Exit

Lets you exit from the current screen

Understanding the home screen

Button

Function

Tips

Opens a context-sensitive Help dialog on the touch screen

Other touch-screen buttons
Button

Function

Saves a setting

Cancel

• Cancels an action or a selection
• Exits a screen and lets you return to the previous screen without saving changes

Reset

Resets values on the screen

Unselected radio button

Indicates that an item is not selected

Selected radio button

Indicates a selection

Lets you search current held jobs

Warning

Indicates a warning or error condition

Understanding the home screen

Features
Feature

Description

Menu trail line:

A Menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.

Menus > Settings > Copy Settings >
Number of Copies

Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu or menu item.
The Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch
an underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies
is set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.

Attendance message alert

If an attendance message affects a function, this icon appears and the red indicator
light blinks.

Customizing the home screen

Customizing the home screen
Notes:

• Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only on select printer
models.

• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit
www.lexmark.com or inquire from the place where you purchased the printer.

Finding the IP address of the scanner
Notes:

• Make sure your scanner is connected to a network or to a print server.
• An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
You can find the scanner IP address:

• From the top left corner of the scanner home screen.
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.

Accessing the Embedded Web Server
Type your scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the Network/Ports
menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the information in the TCP/IP section.

Showing or hiding icons on the home screen
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
A list of basic printer functions appears.

2 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the scanner home screen.
Cleared check box items are hidden.

3 Click Submit.

Customizing the home screen

Activating the home screen applications
Forms and Favorites
For detailed information about configuring and using Forms and Favorites, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Icon

Description
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print
frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, the FTP site, or the Web site
where the bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing,
security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For more information, see
the documentation that came with your operating system.

To configure Forms and Favorites, do the following:

1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.
2 Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.
3 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the scanner home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.

Scan to Network
For detailed information about configuring and using Scan to Network, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Icon

Description
The application lets you capture a digital image of a hard‑copy document and route it to a shared network
folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.
Notes:

• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.

• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
To configure Scan to Network, do the following:

1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Scan to Network.
2 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
3 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the scanner home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
scanner display.

Customizing the home screen

My MFP
For detailed information about configuring and using My MFP, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Icon

Description
The application lets you customize your touch‑screen settings and store those preferences on a flash
drive. Each time you want to copy, fax, or scan, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer. All
your personal preferences are automatically loaded, including job settings, home screen preferences,
and address book.
Note: The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of
the printer.

To activate My MFP, insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer, and then follow the instructions on the scanner
display to run the setup wizard.
To use My MFP, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer whenever you want to copy, fax, or scan.

WS‑Scan
Icon

Description
The Web Services‑Scan application lets you scan documents at the printer, and then send the scanned
image to your computer. WS‑Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network, but has
the capability of sending the scanned document to a Windows‑based application. To learn more about
WS‑Scan, refer to the Microsoft documentation.
Note: The icon appears on the scanner home screen only when there is a computer registered with
the network printer. The computer must have either Windows 8, Windows 7, or Windows Vista
operating system installed.

Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the scanner control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the scanner control
panel, even when you are not physically near the printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer status,
release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing at
the printer.
To activate Remote Operator Panel, do the following:

1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.
2 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
3 Click Apply.
To use Remote Operator Panel, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch
VNC Applet.

Customizing the home screen

Exporting and importing a configuration using the Embedded
Web Server
You can export configuration settings into a text file that can then be imported and used to apply the settings to one
or more additional printers.

Exporting a configuration
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
4 Click Configure > Export.
5 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then enter a unique file name or
use the default name.
Note: If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export until the configuration file is saved.

Importing a configuration
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
4 Click Configure > Import.
5 Browse to the saved configuration file, and then load or preview it.
Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the browser, and then click Apply.

Additional printer setup

Additional printer setup
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.

Installing a scanner communications card in the printer
Notes:

• The scanner communications card should be installed only on its designated slot. If an internal memory is
installed in this slot, then transfer it to the option slot beside it.

• This task requires a screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

1 Open the system board door.

Additional printer setup

2 Using a screwdriver, loosen the screws on the system board cover, but do not remove them.

3 Remove the system board cover.

Additional printer setup

4 Unpack the scanner communications card, and then locate the scanner communications card connector.

Scanner communications card connector

Memory card connector

Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

5 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board, and then push
the card firmly into place.

Notes:

• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.

Additional printer setup

6 Align the screws with the holes on the system board cover, and then reattach the system board cover.

7 Tighten the screws on the system board cover, and then close the system board access door.

Additional printer setup

Installing internal options in the scanner
Available internal options
• Memory cards
– DIMM
– Flash memory
– Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Bar Code
– PrintCryptionTM
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)

Accessing the system board
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the scanner, then turn the scanner off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the scanner, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the scanner.

1 Turn off the scanner.

2 Move the scan bar to its home position.
a From the home screen, touch
> Lock Scanner Head.
b Turn off the scanner and printer.

Additional printer setup

c Lock the scan bar.

3 Tape the scanner cover to secure it in place.

Note: You may use a masking tape.

4 Remove the exit tray.

5 Turn the scanner upside down on a flat surface.

Additional printer setup

6 Remove all screws from the system board cover.

7 Remove the system board cover.

8 Locate the appropriate connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

Additional printer setup

Firmware and flash memory card connectors

Lexmark Internal Solutions Port or scanner hard disk connector

Scanner hard disk*

Memory card connector

Fax modem*

* The scanner is shipped with one hard disk and one fax modem installed on the system board.

9 Reattach the system board cover.

Additional printer setup

10 Attach all the screws to secure the system board cover.

11 While holding the scanner cover, turn the scanner right side up.

12 Reattach the exit tray.
a Attach the tray at the rear hinge.

b Push down the tray to secure it on the front hinge.

Additional printer setup

c Return the tray to its original position.

Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP). Install an ISP for additional connectivity
options.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the scanner, then turn the scanner off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the scanner, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the scanner.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

1 Unpack the ISP and plastic tee.
1

ISP

Plastic mounting bracket

Additional printer setup

Thumbscrews

2 Using a thumbscrew, attach the plastic mounting bracket to the back of the ISP.

3 Access the system board. For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 27.
4 Remove the scanner hard disk.
Note: The hard disk must be removed first for an ISP to be installed.

a Unplug the hard disk interface cable from the system board.

Additional printer setup

b Remove the screws that secure the hard disk.

c Remove the hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.

5 Remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.

Additional printer setup

6 Install the ISP.
a Install the ISP in the same location where the hard disk was located on the system board.

b Push the ISP firmly until it snaps into place.
Note: Make sure the screws of the ISP are accessible through the ISP opening.

Additional printer setup

7 Insert the plug of the ISP interface cable into the connector of the system board.

8 Remove the thumbscrews that attach the hard disk mounting bracket to the hard disk, and then remove the bracket.

9 Remove the small bracket from the system board cage.

Note: Do not discard the screws. These will be used in step 13.

Additional printer setup

10 Attach the small bracket to the hard disk.

Notes:

• Use the small bracket that was removed from the system board cage in step 9.
• Use the thumbscrews that were removed in step 8 to attach the bracket to the hard disk.
11 Align the standoffs of the hard disk with the holes on the ISP, and then press down the hard disk until the standoffs
snap into place.

Additional printer setup

12 Insert the plug of the hard disk interface cable into the connector on the ISP.

13 Secure the hard disk to the system board cage.

Note: Use the thumbscrews that were removed in step 9 to attach the hard disk to the system board cage.

Additional printer setup

14 Secure the ISP to the system board cage using the screws that came with the ISP kit.

Note: The screws will pass through the clearance hole of the system board cage and attached to the bracket of
the ISP.

15 Reattach the system board cover.

Installing a flash memory or firmware card
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory or firmware card. Only one of each may be installed,
but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the scanner, then turn the scanner off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the scanner, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the scanner.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.

1 Access the scanner system board. For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 27
2 Unpack the card.
Note: Avoid touching any electrical components on the card.

3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins on the card with the holes on the system board.

Additional printer setup

4 Push the card firmly into place.

Notes:

• The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
• Be careful not to damage the connectors.
5 Reattach the system board cover.

Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the scanner, then turn the scanner off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the scanner, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the scanner.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the scanner before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.

1 Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 27.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.

2 Unpack the memory card.
Note: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.

Additional printer setup

3 On the system board, open the memory card connector latches.

4 Align the notches on the memory card to the ridges on the connector.

Notch

Ridge

Additional printer setup

5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place.

6 Reattach the system board cover.

Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Install the printer and any options you have purchased in the following order:
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.

•
•
•
•
•

Printer stand or caster base
2,000‑sheet dual trays and high‑capacity feeder
Standard or optional 500‑sheet trays
Duplex unit
Printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.

For more information on installing a printer stand, caster base, or 2,000‑sheet tray, see the setup documentation that
came with the option.

Additional printer setup

Installing optional paper drawers
The printer supports up to four optional drawers. A drawer consists of a tray and a support unit. All drawers are installed
the same way.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.

1 Unpack the drawer, and then remove any packing material.
2 Place the drawer near the printer.
Note: If you have multiple options to install, then see the section about the recommended order of installation.
The 2000‑sheet drawer must be the bottom drawer.

3 Align the printer with the drawer, and then lower the printer into place.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.

Removing an optional drawer
Warning—Potential Damage: Lifting the printer from a drawer without pushing in the safety latches could damage
the latches.
Push the safety latches on both sides of the drawer until they click and stay recessed, and then lift the printer.

Additional printer setup

Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the scanner using the Ethernet cable.
Be sure to match the following:

• The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
• The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port

USB ports
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Ethernet port

Be sure to connect the scanner to the printer using the green Ethernet cable.

Additional printer setup

USB ports
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the scanner in the area
shown while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.

Ethernet port for network connection

Ethernet port for printer connection

Verifying printer setup
Once all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:

• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option and install it again.

• Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page
to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing
configuration.

Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:

Additional printer setup

> Reports > Menu Settings Page

Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page

2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.

Setting up the scanner software
Installing the scanner software
Notes:

• If you installed the scanner software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.

• Close all open software programs before installing the scanner software.
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your scanner.
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your scanner > select your operating system

2 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using a Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK.

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

In Macintosh
Click the CD icon on the desktop.

Additional printer setup

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Updating available options in the printer driver
When any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options in the printer driver to make
them available for use.

For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Depending on your device, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the printer you want to update.
• Right‑click the printer you want to update.
3 From the menu that appears, do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
4 Click the Configuration tab.
5 Do either of the following:
• Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
• Under Configuration Options, manually add any installed hardware options.
6 Click Apply.

For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.

Additional printer setup

Setting up wireless printing
Follow these instructions if your printer model is wireless.
Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X - RADIUS are types of security used on a network.

Preparing to set up the scanner on a wireless network
Notes:

• Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
• Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the scanner on a wireless network:

• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.

• Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.

– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the scanner, or the scanner will not be able to communicate on the
network.

– 802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the scanner on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:

•
•
•
•

Authentication type
Inner authentication type
802.1X user name and password
Certificates

– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:

– If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point or contact
your system support person.

Additional printer setup

– To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.

Installing the scanner on a wireless network (Windows)
Before installing the scanner on a wireless network, make sure:

• Your wireless network is set up and is working properly.
• The computer and the printer you are using are connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up
the scanner.

1 Connect one end of the green Ethernet cable to the printer and the other end to the scanner.

1
2
2 Connect the power cord to the printer and to the scanner, and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

1
2

Additional printer setup

3 Turn on the printer and the scanner.

Note: Make sure the scanner, the printer, and the computer are fully on and ready.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.

4 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your scanner.
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your scanner > select your operating system

5 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type: D:\setup.exe > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

6 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
7 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.
8 From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup.
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.

Additional printer setup

9 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the scanner.

Note: After the scanner is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so
you can print wirelessly.

10 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Installing the scanner on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Prepare to configure the scanner
1 Connect one end of the green Ethernet cable to the printer and the other end to the scanner.

1
2
2 Connect the power cord to the printer and to the scanner, and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet.

Additional printer setup

1
2

3 Turn on the printer and the scanner.

4 Locate the scanner MAC address.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page

b In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).
Note: You will need this information later.

Enter the scanner information
1 Access the AirPort options.
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

• System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
• System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort

2 From the Network Name pop‑up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y’s are the last six digits of the MAC
address you obtained earlier from the printed network setup page.

3 Open a Web browser.

Additional printer setup

4 From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.
5 Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double‑click the device name.
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.

6 From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to the location of the wireless settings information.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1 Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as the Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).
3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect your wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the scanner to connect to the wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on your computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

• System Preferences > Network > Wi‑Fi
• System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort

7 From the Network pop‑up menu, select the name of your wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the scanner wirelessly
To print over a network, you must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in the Print Center or
Printer Setup Utility.

1 Install a printer driver file on the computer:
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your printer.
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your printer > select your operating system

b
c
d
e
f

Double‑click the installer package for the scanner.
Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Select a destination, and then click Continue.
From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary applications are installed on the computer.

g Click Close when the installation is complete.

Additional printer setup

2 Add the device:
a For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:

• System Preferences > Print & Scan
• System Preferences > Print & Fax
2
3
4
5

Click +.
If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.
Click the IP tab.
Type the IP address of the scanner in the address field, and then click Add.

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type the IP address of the scanner in the address field, and then click Add.

b For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:

• Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your scanner.
• This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the device from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the printer list, click Add.
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the device from the list, and then click Add.

Preparing to set up the scanner on an Ethernet network
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and other devices, continue on to installing
the scanner.

Additional printer setup

To configure your scanner to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:

•
•
•
•

A valid, unique IP address for the scanner to use on the network
The network gateway
The network mask
A nickname for the scanner (optional)
Note: A scanner nickname makes it easier for you to identify your scanner on the network. You can choose to
use the default scanner nickname, or you can assign a name that is easier to remember.

You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the scanner to the network and an available port where the scanner can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.

Installing the scanner on an Ethernet network
Note: Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the scanner.

For Windows users
1 Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your scanner.
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your scanner > select your operating system

2 Double‑click the software installer package.
Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type: D:\setup.exe > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
c Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: To configure the scanner using a static IP address, IPv6, or scripts, select Advanced Options >
Administrator Tools.

4 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
5 Attach the Ethernet cable when instructed to do so.

Additional printer setup

6 Select the scanner from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured scanner does not appear in the list, then click Modify Search.

7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the scanner.
2 Obtain the scanner IP address either:
• From the scanner control panel
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the
scanner.

3 Install the printer driver on the computer.
a Double‑click the installer package for the scanner.
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed on the computer.

f Click Close when the installation is complete.
4 Add the scanner.
• For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.
d Click the IP tab.
e Type the scanner IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
a From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities

b Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
c From the printer list, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
d Type the scanner IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:

– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.

Additional printer setup

– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select your scanner > Add

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
a From the Finder, navigate to:
b
c
d
e
f
g

Applications > Utilities
Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
From the printer list, click Add.
Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
Select the device from the list, and then click Add.

Note: If the scanner does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. For more
information, contact your system support person.

Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal
Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the scanner, the scanner configurations on computers
that access the scanner must be updated since the scanner will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the scanner must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:

• If the scanner has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer
configurations.

• If the computers are configured to use the network name, instead of an IP address, then you do not need to
make any changes to your computer configurations.

• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a scanner previously configured for an Ethernet connection, then make sure
the scanner is disconnected from the Ethernet network when you configure the scanner to operate wirelessly. If
the scanner is connected to the Ethernet network, then the wireless configuration completes, but the wireless
ISP is inactive. To activate the wireless ISP, disconnect the scanner from the Ethernet network, turn off the
scanner, and then turn it back on.

• Only one network connection is active at a time. To switch between Ethernet and wireless connection types,
turn off the scanner, then connect the cable (to switch to an Ethernet connection) or disconnect the cable (to
switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the scanner back on.

For Windows users
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the scanner IP address in the address field.

Additional printer setup

Notes:

• View the scanner IP address on the scanner control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter or click OK.
3 To select the device that has changed, do either of the following:
• Press and hold the scanner, and then select Printer properties.
• Right‑click the scanner, and then select Printer properties (Windows 7 or later) or Properties (earlier versions).
Note: If there is more than one copy of the scanner, then update all of them with the new IP address.

4 Click the Ports tab.
5 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
6 Type the new IP address in the Printer Name or IP Address field.
7 Click OK > Close.

For Macintosh users
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the scanner IP address in the address field.
Notes:

• View the scanner IP address on the scanner control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.

• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Add the scanner.
• For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
a From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
– System Preferences > Print & Scan
– System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +.
c If necessary, click Add Printer or Scanner or Add Other Printer or Scanner.
d Click the IP tab.
e Type the scanner IP address in the address field, and then click Add.

Additional printer setup

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
a From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
b Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
c From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
d Type the IP address of the scanner in the address field, and then click Add.

• For AppleTalk printing:
Notes:

– Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your scanner.
– This feature is supported only in Mac OS X version 10.5 or earlier.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
a From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
b Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the scanner > Add

In Mac OS X version 10.4 or earlier
a From the Finder, navigate to:
b
c
d
e
f
g

Applications > Utilities
Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
From the Printer List, click Add.
Click the Default Browser tab > More Printers.
From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
Select the device from the list, and then click Add.

Setting up serial printing
Use serial printing to print when the computer is far from the scanner or to print at a reduced speed.
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the scanner and the computer. Make sure you have
connected the serial cable to the COM port on your scanner.

1 Set the parameters in the scanner.
a From the scanner control panel, navigate to the menu for the port settings.
b Locate the menu for the serial port settings, and then adjust the settings if necessary.
c Save the modified settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2 Install the printer driver.
a Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
• From the Software and Documentation CD that came with your scanner.
• From our Web site:
Go to http://support.lexmark.com, and then navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOAD > select your scanner > select your operating system

b Double‑click the software installer package.

Additional printer setup

Wait for the installation dialog to appear.
If you are using the Software and Documentation CD and the installation dialog does not appear, then do the
following:

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type D:\setup.exe > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
1 Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe.
3 Press Enter or click OK.
Note: D is the letter of your CD or DVD drive.

c Click Advanced Options > Custom Install.
d Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
e From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select Connect through a port discovered on your computer,
and then select a port.

f If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh or navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter the necessary information > OK

g Click Continue.
1 If you want to add another device, then click Add Another.
2 If you want to make changes, then select a device, and then click Edit.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Click Finish.
3 Set the COM port parameters.
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the scanner.

a Open Device Manager.

In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type devmgmt.msc > OK

In Windows 7 or earlier
1 Click or click Start, and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type devmgmt.msc.
3 Press Enter or click OK.
b Double‑click Ports (COM & LPT) to expand the list of available ports.
c Do either of the following:
• Press and hold the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
• Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d From the menu that appears, select Properties.

Additional printer setup

e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters set in the scanner.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the scanner settings.

f Click OK, and then close all the dialogs.
g Print a test page to verify scanner installation.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:

• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.

Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see "Using Eco-Mode".

Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 83.

Conserving supplies
There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing. You can:

Use both sides of the paper
You can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print
dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar.

Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog.

Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:

• Use the preview feature, which you can select from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar, to see how the document
will look before you print it.

• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Avoid paper jams
Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 248.

Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Network/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting > Submit.
Choose

Off

Use factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. This setting supports the performance
specifications of your scanner.

Energy

Reduce energy use, especially when the scanner is idle.

• Scanner engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the first
page is printed.

• The scanner enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
• When the scanner enters Sleep mode, the scanner control panel display and the standard exit bin lights
are turned off.

• The scanner lamps are activated only when a scan job is started.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy mode and Paper mode.
Paper

• Enable the automatic duplex feature.
• Turn off print log features.

Reducing scanner noise
To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:

1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Network/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting > Submit.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Choose

Off

Use factory default settings. This setting supports the
performance specifications of your scanner.

Note: Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
On

Reduce scanner noise.

• Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.
• Scanner engine motors do not start until a document is
ready to print. There will be a short delay before the first
page is printed.

• Fax sounds are reduced or disabled, including those made
by the fax speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby
mode.

• The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are turned
off.

• The scanner will ignore the Advance Start command.

Adjusting Sleep Mode
To save energy, you can decrease the number of minutes before the scanner enters Sleep Mode.
Available settings range from 1–240 minutes.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Network/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
4 Click Submit.
Using the scanner control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts

2 Touch the arrows next to Sleep Mode to select the number of minutes you want the printer to wait before it
enters Sleep Mode.

3 Touch Submit.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading your display, then adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.

Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Using the scanner control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings

2 Touch the arrows until Screen Brightness appears, and then select a setting.
3 Touch Submit.

Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:

• The Notices chapter
• The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
• The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle

Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.

Minimizing your printer's environmental impact

Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.

Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:

1 Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.

Loading paper and specialty media

Loading paper and specialty media
Loading paper
Loading the standard or optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray
1 Pull the tray out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.

2 Squeeze the width guide tab, and then slide the guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.

Loading paper and specialty media

3 Unlock the length guide, squeeze the length guide tab, and then slide the guide to the correct position for the paper
size being loaded.

Notes:

• Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
• For standard paper sizes, lock the length guide.
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.

5 Load the paper stack:
• Print side facedown for single‑sided printing
• Print side faceup for duplex printing
Note: Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmartTM II Finisher is installed.

Single‑sided printing

ERHE

LETT

With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher
LETT

Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher

Single‑sided printing

Loading paper and specialty media

Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher

With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher

RHEAD

LETTE

D
RHEA
LETTE

Duplex (two‑sided) printing

Note: Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the edge of the paper tray.

6 If necessary, then adjust the paper guides to lightly touch the sides of the stack, and then lock the length guide.
7 Insert the tray.

8 From the home screen, verify the paper size and paper type for the tray based on the paper you loaded.

Loading paper and specialty media

Loading the 2000‑sheet tray
1 Pull the tray out.
2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size being loaded.

3 Unlock the length guide.

Loading paper and specialty media

4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide, slide the guide to the correct position for the paper
size being loaded, and then lock the guide.

5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.

6 Load the paper stack:
• Print side facedown for single‑sided printing
• Print side faceup for duplex printing
Note: Paper must be loaded differently in the trays if an optional StapleSmart II Finisher is installed.

Loading paper and specialty media

Single‑sided printing

HEAD

LETTER

With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher

LETTER

Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher

Single‑sided printing

HEAD

LETTER

HEAD
Duplex (two‑sided) printing

Duplex (two‑sided) printing

Note: Make sure the paper is below the maximum fill line located on the side of the tray.

Loading paper and specialty media

7 Insert the tray.

Loading the multipurpose feeder
1 Press the release latch, and then pull down the multipurpose feeder door.

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Pull the extension until it is fully extended.

3 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the far right.

4 Flex the sheets of paper or specialty media back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease them. Straighten
the edges on a level surface.
Paper

Envelopes

Transparencies
Note: Avoid touching the print side.

Loading paper and specialty media

5 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack gently into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Without an optional StapleSmart II Finisher

EAD

HEAD
LETTER

LETTERH

With an optional StapleSmart II Finisher

Single‑sided printing

RHEA

ERHE

Duplex (two‑sided) printing

LETT

LETTE

Single‑sided printing

Duplex (two‑sided) printing

Notes:

•
•
•
•

Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing paper under the stack height limiter.
Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
Load only one size and type of media at a time.
Load envelopes with the flap side down and to the left as shown on the tray.

Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the
multipurpose feeder, lies flat, and is not bent or wrinkled.

7 From the home screen, set the paper size and paper type.

Loading paper and specialty media

Loading the envelope feeder
1 Adjust the envelope support for the length of envelope being loaded:
• Short envelopes—Fully close the envelope support.
• Medium‑length envelopes—Extend the envelope support to the middle position.
• Long envelopes—Fully extend the envelope support.
2 Lift the envelope weight back toward the printer.

3 Slide the width guide to the right.

4 Flex the envelopes back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.

5 Load the stack of envelopes flap side down.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.

Loading paper and specialty media

Note: Do not exceed the maximum stack height by forcing envelope under the stack height limiter.

6 Adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the envelope stack.
7 Lower the envelope weight to touch the envelope stack.
8 From the home screen, set the paper size and paper type.

Loading business cards into the ADF
1 Move the ADF guides to the A8 paper size position.

Note: Use the size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides .

Loading paper and specialty media

2 Load the business cards facedown, short‑edge first into the ADF.

Note: Make sure the last edge of the business card is aligned with the A8 mark on the ADF guide.

Setting the paper size and type
Setting the paper size and type for difficult media
Setting the paper size and type allows the user to optimize the ability of the scanner to handle specific paper types and
sizes such as letter, legal, tabloid, A5, A4 and A3.
For more information, see “Custom Scan Sizes menu” on page 155.
Note: Changing the paper size and type settings affects the scanning resolution and speed.

Configuring the ADF scan settings for any paper size and type
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > Default ADF Media Type > Rough/Cotton > Submit

2 Touch

> Paper Menu > Custom Scan Size [x] > Media Type > ADF Media Type > Submit.

3 Touch

> Paper Menu > Paper Texture > Rough/Cotton Texture.

Loading paper and specialty media

4 Select a value for Rough/Cotton.
Note: Make sure the default value is not Normal.

5 Touch Submit.

Configuring the ADF scan settings for a specific paper size and type
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > Default ADF Media Type > Rough/Cotton > Submit

2 Touch

> Paper Menu > Paper Texture > Rough/Cotton Texture.

3 Select a value for Rough/Cotton.
Note: Make sure the default value is not Normal.

4 Touch Submit.

Configuring the ADF scan settings for custom paper size and type
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Scan Sizes > select a scan size name and paper type
Notes:

• Custom Scan Size 1–3 will appear as Difficult Media Letter, Difficult Media Legal, and Difficult Media Tabloid
if the scanner unit of measure unit is set to US.

• Custom Scan Size 1–3 will appear as Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media A4, and Difficult Media A3 if the
scanner unit of measure is set to Metric.

• If any value between Custom Scan Sizes 1–3 is selected, then the ADF automatically reduces its feeding
speed.

2 Touch

> Paper Menu > Paper Texture > Rough/Cotton Texture.

3 Select a value for Rough/Cotton.
Note: Make sure the default value is not Normal.

4 Touch Submit.

Setting the paper size and type for the printer
The Paper Size setting is automatically sensed according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
multipurpose feeder. The Paper Size setting for the multipurpose feeder must be set manually from the Paper Size
menu. The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays that do not contain plain paper.
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit

Loading paper and specialty media

Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:

• Units of Measure
• Portrait Width
• Portrait Height
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure

2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height > select the width or height > Submit.

Setting the ADF to detect multiple paper feeds
When activated, the multifeed sensor allows the scanner to detect when the ADF picks more than one sheet of paper
at once.
Note: The multifeed sensor is on by default.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > ADF Multi-feed Sensor
Note: Touch Off to turn off the multifeed sensor. You may need to turn off this setting for scan jobs using the
following media:

•
•
•
•

Business cards
Thick paper
Different paper types and sizes
Paper with labels

2 Touch Submit.

Linking and unlinking trays
Linking trays
Tray linking is useful for large print jobs or multiple copies. When one linked tray is empty, paper feeds from the next
linked tray. When the Paper Size and Paper Type settings are the same for any trays, the trays are automatically linked.
The printer automatically senses the Paper Size setting according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except
the standard 550‑sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder. The printer can sense A4, A5, JIS B5, Letter, Legal, Executive,
and Universal paper sizes. The multipurpose feeder and trays using other paper sizes can be linked manually using the
Paper Size menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: To link the multipurpose feeder, Configure MP must be set to Cassette in the Paper menu in order for MP
Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.

Loading paper and specialty media

The Paper Type setting must be set for all trays from the Paper Type menu available from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Unlinking trays
Note: Trays that do not have the same settings as any other tray are not linked.
Change one of the following tray settings:

• Paper Type
Paper Type names describe the paper characteristics. If the name that best describes your paper is used by linked
trays, assign a different Paper Type name to the tray, such as Custom Type [x], or define your own custom name.

• Paper Size
Load a different paper size to automatically change the Paper Size setting for a tray. Paper Size settings for the
multipurpose feeder are not automatic; they must be set manually from the Paper Size menu.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not assign a Paper Type name that does not accurately describe the type of paper
loaded in a tray. The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified Paper Type. Prints may not be
properly processed if an inaccurate Paper Type is selected.

Creating a custom name for a paper type
If the scanner is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x]
for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.

1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit.
Note: This custom name will replace the Custom Type [x] name under the Custom Types and Paper Size and
Type menus.

3 Click Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit.

Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a custom paper type name > select a tray > Submit

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Paper and specialty media guidelines
Notes:

•
•
•
•

Make sure the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or on the printer control panel.
Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading it.
The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.

Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.

Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier
paper.
Note: Duplex is supported only for 63 g/m2–170 g/m2 (17 lb–45 lb bond) paper.

Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.

Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.

Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2, grain
short is recommended.

Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.

Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:

• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.

Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
•
•
•
•

Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.

• Print samples on preprinted forms and letterheads considered for use before buying large quantities. This
determines whether or not the ink in the preprinted form or letterhead will affect print quality.

• When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.

Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:

• Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
• Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
• Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)

Paper and specialty media guidelines

•
•
•
•
•

Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)

• Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:

1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.

3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.

Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:

•
•
•
•

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)

• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)

Paper and specialty media guidelines

• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
• Multiple part forms or documents
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.

Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:

• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.

•
•
•
•

Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
Store individual packages on a flat surface.
Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.

Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they
support.
Note: To use a paper size that is unlisted, configure a Universal paper size.

Supported paper sizes
Scanner
Paper size
A4

ADF

ADF - Automatic

ADF - Mixed sizes

210 x 297 mm (8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.)

105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 in.)
JIS B5

182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.)
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in.)
1

Paper size is supported if printer is set to Metric.

2.Paper

size is supported if printer is set to US.

Scanner glass

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Paper size

ADF

Legal

ADF - Automatic

ADF - Mixed sizes

Scanner glass

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive

184 x 267 mm (7.3 x 10.5 in.)
JIS B4
257 x 364 mm
(10.12 x 14.33 in.)
A3
297 x 420 mm
(11.69 x 16.54 in.)
11x17
279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in.)
Oficio
216 x 340 mm (8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio

X
X

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement

140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in.)
Universal

138 x 210 mm (5.5 x 8.3 in.)
up to 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
1

Paper size is supported if printer is set to Metric.

2.Paper

size is supported if printer is set to US.

Printer
Paper size

250‑ or
550‑sheet
trays

2000‑sheet
tray

MP feeder

Manual Paper

Manual
Envelope

Duplex unit

210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
A5

148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in.)
A6
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)

* To support duplexing, the Universal media length must be between 7.17 inches (182.1 mm) and 14.17 inches (355.6 mm).
The width must be between 5.83 inches (148.1 mm) and 8.5 inches (215.9 mm).

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Paper size

250‑ or
550‑sheet
trays

JIS B5

2000‑sheet
tray

MP feeder

Manual Paper

Manual
Envelope

Duplex unit

182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
Letter

216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal

216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive

184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
JIS B4
257 x 364 mm
(10.12 x 14.33 in.)

297 x 420 mm
(11.69 x 16.54 in.)
11x17
279 x 432 mm
(11 x 17 in.)
Oficio

216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
Universal

138 x 210 mm
(5.5 x 8.3 in.) up to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)

98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
* To support duplexing, the Universal media length must be between 7.17 inches (182.1 mm) and 14.17 inches (355.6 mm).
The width must be between 5.83 inches (148.1 mm) and 8.5 inches (215.9 mm).

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Paper size

250‑ or
550‑sheet
trays

2000‑sheet
tray

MP feeder

Manual Paper

Manual
Envelope

Duplex unit

9 Envelope

B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm (6.93
x9.84 in.)

Other Envelope

98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
C5 Envelope
162 x229 mm (6.38 x
9.01 in.)

98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.4 in.) to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
* To support duplexing, the Universal media length must be between 7.17 inches (182.1 mm) and 14.17 inches (355.6 mm).
The width must be between 5.83 inches (148.1 mm) and 8.5 inches (215.9 mm).

Supported paper types and weights
The printer engine supports 60–176 g/m2 (16–47 lb) paper weights. The duplex path supports 63–170 g/m2 (17–45 lb)
paper weights.

Paper and specialty media guidelines

Paper type

250‑ or
Optional
550‑sheet trays 2000‑sheet
tray

MP feeder

Manual Paper

Paper

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Manual
Envelope

Duplex

Plain
Bond
Colored
Custom
Letterhead
Light
Heavy
Preprinted
Rough/Cotton
Recycled

Card stock
Envelopes

X
X

Labels *

X
X

• Paper
• Vinyl
Transparencies

* Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which is included with the special cartridge required for label
applications.

Note: The ADF and scanner glass accept any media type supported by the printer.

Printing

Printing
This chapter covers printing, printer reports, and job cancelation. The selection and handling of paper and specialty
media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 248 and “Storing
paper” on page 85.

Printing a document
Printing a document
1 From the scanner control panel Paper menu, set Paper Type and Paper Size to match the loaded paper.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust settings as needed.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings as needed in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the loaded paper.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings as needed in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings as needed.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the loaded paper, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.

Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
http://lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.

Printing

Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:

• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, enter the file password from the scanner control panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.

Notes:

• If you insert the flash drive when the scanner requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
scanner ignores the flash drive.

• If you insert the flash drive while the scanner is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory
device, or the scanner in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A
loss of data can occur.

Printing

2 From the scanner control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to increase the number of copies to print, and then touch Print.
Notes:

• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the scanner after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print
files from the flash drive as held jobs.

Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drive

• Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
• SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
Notes:

• Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the Full‑Speed standard. Devices supporting only USB
low‑speed capabilities are not supported.

• USB flash drives must support the FAT (File Allocation Tables) system. Devices formatted with NTFS
(New Technology File System) or any other file system are not supported.

File type
Documents:

• .pdf
• .xps
Images:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

.dcx
.gif
.JPEG
.jpg
.bmp
.pcx
.TIFF
.tif
.png

Printing

Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•
•
•
•

Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Before loading letterhead, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:

– “Loading the standard or optional 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray” on page 67
– “Loading the 2000‑sheet tray” on page 70
– “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 73

Tips on using transparencies
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on transparencies:

• Feed transparencies from a 250‑sheet tray, a 550‑sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

•
•
•
•

Use transparencies that are 138–146 g/m2 (37–39 lb. bond) in weight.
To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
We recommend Lexmark part number 12A5010 for A4‑size transparencies and Lexmark part number 70X7240 for
letter‑size transparencies.

Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on envelopes:

• Feed envelopes from the multipurpose feeder or the optional envelope feeder.
• Set the Paper Type to Envelope, and select the envelope size.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the
envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

• For the best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper. Use up to 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond)
weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25% or less. All‑cotton envelopes must not exceed 90 g/m2
(24 lb bond) weight.

• Use only new envelopes.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way

Printing

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
Have an interlocking design
Have postage stamps attached
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
Have bent corners
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

• Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.

Tips on using labels
Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Notes:

• Paper, dual‑web paper, polyester, and vinyl labels are supported.
• When using the duplex unit, specially‑designed, integrated, and dual‑web paper labels are supported.
• Printing labels requires a special label fuser cleaner which is included with the special cartridge required for
label applications. For more information, see “Ordering supplies” on page 237.
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on
the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/publications.
When printing on labels:

• Feed labels from a 250‑sheet tray, a 550‑sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
• Use labels designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.

– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.

• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.

• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.

• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, remove a 1.6‑mm (0.06‑in.) strip on the leading and driver edge, and
use a non‑oozing adhesive.

• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.

Printing

Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
When printing on card stock:

•
•
•
•

Feed card stock from a 250‑sheet tray, a 550‑sheet tray, or the multipurpose feeder.
Make sure the Paper Type is Card Stock.
Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.

• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 230°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.

• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.

• Use grain short card stock when possible.

Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the scanner
You can set the scanner to store print jobs in the scanner memory until you start the print job from the scanner control
panel.
All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the scanner are called held jobs.
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the scanner requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Print job type

Description

Confidential

Confidential lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from
the scanner control panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.

Verify

Verify lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is
automatically deleted from the scanner memory once all copies are printed.

Reserve

Reserve allows the scanner to store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print
jobs are held until deleted from the Help Jobs menu.

Repeat

Repeat prints and stores print jobs in the scanner memory for reprinting.

Printing

Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you choose to delete them.

For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.

5 Click OK or Print.
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter PIN > select print job > specify number of copies >
Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > select print job > specify number of copies > Print

For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.

2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.

4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter PIN > select print job > specify number of copies >
Print

• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > your user name > select print job > specify number of copies > Print

Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts

2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.

Printing

Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory

Printing print quality test pages
Print the print quality test pages to isolate print quality problems.

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Hold down

2 ABC

and

6 MNO

while turning the printer on.

3 Release the buttons when the screen with the progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power‑on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears.

4 Touch Print Quality Pages Menu > Print Quality Pages.
5 Touch Exit Config Menu to return to the home screen.

Adjusting toner darkness
1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can::

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Network/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4 Click Submit.

Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the scanner control panel
1 From the scanner control panel, touch Cancel Jobs or press

on the keypad.

2 Touch the print job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press

on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Printing

Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Apps list > Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier

a Click or click Start, and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 Click Delete.

For Macintosh users
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to either of the following:
• System Preferences > Print & Scan > select your printer > Open Print Queue
• System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Open Print Queue
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.

Copying

Copying
ADF

• Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
• Load letter- and A4- size documents into the ADF
facedown, long edge first.

• Load legal- and A3- size documents into the ADF
facedown, short edge first.

Scanner glass

• Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such
as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or
thin media (such as magazine clippings).

• Load an original document facedown on the lower left
corner of the scanner glass.

Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the scanner control panel, touch Copy It.

Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It

Copying

100

Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the lower left corner.
Note: Make sure the edge of the document is aligned with the edge of the scanner glass.

2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It

3 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next
Page.

4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.

Copying film photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the lower left corner of the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >

> Photo/Film >

> Copy It

3 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.

Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >

4 Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains transparencies, or touch Manual Feeder Size.
5 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder.
6 From the home screen, navigate to:
> select the size of the transparencies loaded > Manual Feeder Type >

> Copy It

Copying

101

Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > specify the size of the original document > Copy to > Manual Feeder

4 If you are printing on one side of the letterhead and using a finisher, then place the letterhead faceup, top edge
first in the multipurpose feeder.
Note: For the proper letterhead orientation, see “Loading the multipurpose feeder” on page 73.

5 Select the size of the letterxhead.
6 Navigate to:
Continue > Letterhead > Continue > Copy It

Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document >
5 Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy >

6 Touch Copy It.

Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > specify the size of the original document > Copy to

Copying

102

4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.

5 Touch Copy It.

Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).

Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

> Copy to > Auto Size Match >

> Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.

Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >

> Copy to > Letter >

> Copy It

The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.

Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.

Copying

103

4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For
example, select 1‑sided to 2‑sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2‑sided copies.

5 Touch

, and then Copy It.

Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, then the content of your original document will
be scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.

1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Note: Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.

5 Touch Copy It.

Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content

4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.

• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
5 Touch

6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.

Copying

•
•
•
•

104

Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

7 Touch

> Copy It.

Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated

Not collated

By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off >

> Copy It

Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Collate must be set to On for the separator sheets to be placed between copies. If Collate is set to Off,
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the print job.

4 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
• Between Pages
• None
5 Touch

, and then Copy It.

Copying

105

Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
To save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single sheet of
paper.
Notes:

• The paper size must be set to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• The copy size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select output >

> Copy It

Creating a custom copy job (job build)
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:

• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.

4 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Automatic
Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.

5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.

Copying

106

Pausing a print job
Job Interrupt pauses the current print job and lets you print copies.
Note: The Job Interrupt setting must be set to On for this feature to function.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Touch Copy It.
4 If you placed the document on the scanner glass, then touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.

Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer

4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.
5 Touch Yes or No.
6 Touch

, and then Copy It.

Placing an overlay message on each page
You can choose the overlay message from Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, or Draft.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message >

4 Touch Copy It.

Copying

107

Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the scan screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears the page in the ADF and cancels the job.

Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.

Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the scanner control panel, touch Cancel Job or press

on the keypad.

2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Note: If you press

on the keypad, then touch Resume to return to the home screen.

Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size of the documents you are going to copy.

• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy from” setting. The copy screen appears with the new setting
displayed.

• When “Copy from” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Copy from” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original document.

Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.

• Touch a paper size button to select it as the “Copy to” setting. The copy screen appears with your new setting
displayed.

• If the size settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.

• If the type or size of paper that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, touch Manual Feeder, and
manually send the paper through the multipurpose feeder.

• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the size of the original document. If a matching paper
size is not in one of the trays, the printer scales each copy to fit loaded paper.

Copying

108

Copies
This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.

Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can
also be set for you automatically.

• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, setting the
“Copy from” and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes the scale to keep all the original document information
on your copy.

• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.

Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of
two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies
(simplex) from two-sided original documents.

Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).

Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.

• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.

• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.

Copying

•
•
•
•
•

109

Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change ADF Skew Fix, Advanced Duplex, Advanced
Imaging, Create Booklet, Cover Page Setup, Custom Job, Edge Erase, Header/Footer, Margin Shift, Overlay, Paper Saver,
and Separator Sheets settings.

• ADF Skew Fix—Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image.
• Advanced Duplex—Use to specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and
how documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printer.

• Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before you copy the document.

• Create Booklet—Use to create a booklet. You can choose between 1‑sided and 2‑sided booklets.
Note: This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed.

• Cover Page Setup—Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page.
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• Header/Footer—Use to turn on Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text, and prints them in the
specified header or footer location.

• Margin Shift—Use to increase the size of the margin of an specified distance by shifting the scanned image. This
can be useful in providing space to bind or hole-punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much
of a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.

• Overlay—Use to create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose between
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word
you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.

• Paper Saver—Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is
also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on
a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders
adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.

• Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.

Copying

Save As Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.

110

E-mailing

111

E-mailing
ADF

Scanner glass

Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as
• Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
• Load letter- and A4- size documents into the ADF facedown, postcards or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin
long edge first.

media (such as magazine clippings).

• Load legal- and A3- size documents into the ADF facedown,
short edge first.

You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.

Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen or in the TCP/IP section under the
Network/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.
3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4 Click Submit.

Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.

E-mailing

112

If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen or in the TCP/IP section under the
Network/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4 Click Submit.

Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen or in the TCP/IP section under the
Network/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E‑mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).

5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

Creating an e-mail shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.

2 Touch

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.

E-mailing

113

E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the touch screen
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient

4 Enter the e‑mail address, or press

and then enter the shortcut number.

To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.

5 Touch Done > Send It.

Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press

, enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch

To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.

4 Touch Send It.

Using the address book
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail >Recipient(s) >

> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts

E-mailing

114

4 Touch the name of the recipients.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add, or search the address book.

5 Touch Done.

Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e‑mail address.
5 Touch Options > Subject.
6 Type the e-mail subject.
7 Touch Done > Message.
8 Type an e-mail message.
9 Touch Done > E-mail It.

Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address > Send as

4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided
free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.

• Secure PDF—Use to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent
JPEG.

E-mailing

115

• JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web
browsers and graphics programs.

• XPS—Use to create a single XML Paper Specification (XPS) file with multiple pages, viewable using a Web
browser-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.

5 Touch E‑mail It.
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, then you will be prompted to enter your password twice.

Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.

Understanding e-mail options
Recipients
This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.

Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.

Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.

File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.

Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.

• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e‑mail screen appears with the new
setting displayed.

• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.

E-mailing

116

Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.

Color
This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.

Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.

• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.

• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.

• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers
and graphics programs

• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer

E-mailing

117

Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.

• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the
orientation.

• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change ADF Skew Fix, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Edge Erase,
and Transmission Log settings.

• ADF Skew Fix—This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image.
• Advanced Imaging—This lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before you e‑mail the document.

• Custom Job—This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job
• Edge Erase—This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to
eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• Transmission Log—This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log

Faxing

118

Faxing
Note: Fax capabilities may not be available on all printer models.
ADF

Scanner glass

media (such as magazine clippings).

• Load legal- and A3- size documents into the ADF facedown,
short edge first.

Getting the scanner ready to fax
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
Note: During the initial scanner setup, deselect Fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch
Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the scanner in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.

Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other
entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business,
other entity, or individual).

Faxing

119

Choosing a fax connection
To determine the best way to set up the scanner, see the following table.
Notes:

• The scanner is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the wall outlet.
• If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, then a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is
required. Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone
line that can interfere with the ability of the scanner to fax properly.

• You do not need to attach the scanner to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
Equipment and service options

Fax connection setup

Connect directly to the telephone line

See “Connecting to an analog telephone line” on page 119.

Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 120.
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 120.
Services Digital Network (ISDN) system
Use a Distinctive Ring service

See “Connecting to a distinctive ring service” on page 121.

Connect through an adapter used in your area

See “Connecting to an adapter for your country or region” on
page 121.

Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US‑style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the
equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the scanner to the scanner LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

Faxing

120

Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the scanner to the scanner LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.

3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.

Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the scanner to the scanner LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:

•
•
•
•
•

Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.
When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX
system.

Faxing

121

Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be
useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these
steps to connect the equipment:

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the scanner to the scanner LINE port .
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.

3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the scanner to answer:
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the scanner to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.

a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Settings > Rings to Answer

b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.

Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone
wall jack:
Country/Region

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Austria
Cyprus
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Ireland
Italy

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

New Zealand
Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
Sweden
Switzerland
United Kingdom

Faxing

122

For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering
machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.

1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the scanner to the scanner LINE port
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone
wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your
location.

Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the scanner, then you can:

• View the IP address on the scanner control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.

Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may
have to reset the date and time.

1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the scanner, then you can:

• View the IP address on the scanner control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.

Faxing

123

Configuring the scanner to observe daylight saving time
The scanner can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:

1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the scanner, then you can:

• View the IP address on the scanner control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.

4 Click Submit.

Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the scanner control panel each time you want to
send a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a
single fax number or a group of fax numbers.

1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the scanner, then you can:

• View the IP address on the scanner control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then get one from your system
support person.

3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).

4 Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

5 Click Add.

Creating a fax destination shortcut using the touch screen
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.

Faxing

124

3 On the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.

4 Navigate to:
> type a name for the shortcut > Done > OK > Fax It

Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the touch screen
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press
. The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax
to” box. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.

5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option allows you to “print to fax,” where the scanner sends a queued document as a fax rather
than print it. The fax option functions as a normal fax machine, but it is controlled through the printer driver instead
of through the scanner control panel.

1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Navigate to:
Fax tab > Enable fax

4 Enter the recipient fax number or numbers in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Note: Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature.

5 If necessary, enter a prefix in the “Dialing prefix” field.
6 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
7 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and then enter the
appropriate information.

8 Click OK.

Faxing

125

Notes:

• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or with the Universal Fax Driver. For
information on installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.

• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under the Configuration tab before it
can be used.

• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you are prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is cleared, then the queued document is sent
automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.

Sending a fax using shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.

1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press

, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.

4 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax using the address book
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >

> Browse shortcuts

4 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.

5 Touch Done > Fax It.

Faxing

126

Using shortcuts and the address book
Using fax shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. You can assign shortcut numbers
when creating permanent fax destinations. Permanent fax destinations or speed dial numbers are created in the
Manage Shortcuts link located under Settings on the Embedded Web Server. A shortcut number (1–99999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients. By creating a group fax shortcut with a shortcut number, you can quickly and
easily fax broadcast information to an entire group.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press

, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.

4 Touch Fax It.

Using the address book
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >

> Browse shortcuts

4 Using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.

5 Touch Done > Fax It.

Faxing

127

Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (slowest speed, best quality).

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
5 Touch Fax It.

Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options

4 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.
5 Touch Fax It.

Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the Fax Queue.

Faxing

128

4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, then the left arrow is
unavailable.

5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.

Viewing a fax log
1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Reports > Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.

Blocking junk faxes
1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:

• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to
block.

Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning… appears or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.

Faxing

129

Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.

2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.

3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.

Understanding fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the amount
of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.

•
•
•
•

Standard—Suitable for most documents
Fine—Recommended for documents with small print
Super fine—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
Ultra fine—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos

Faxing

130

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.

Color
This option enables or disables color in faxing.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding settings.

• Sides (Duplex)—Use to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.

• Orientation—Use to specify the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match
the orientation.

• Binding—Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Advanced Options
Touching this button lets you change Delayed Send, Advanced Imaging, Custom Job, Transmission Log, Edge Erase and
ADF Skew Fix settings.

• Delayed Send—This lets you send a fax at a later time or date. After setting up your fax, touch Delayed Send, enter
the time and date you would like to send your fax, and then touch Done. This setting can be especially useful in
sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain hours, or when transmission times are
cheaper.
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, the fax is sent the next time the
printer is turned on.

• Advanced Imaging—This lets you adjust the Background Removal, Contrast, Color Balance, Negative Image, Mirror
Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the document.

• Custom Job (Job Build)—This lets you combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Transmission Log—This lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Edge Erase—This lets you eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to
eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• ADF Skew Fix—This lets you correct slight skew in the scanned image.

Faxing

131

Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.

1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 In the Print Faxes Password field, enter a password.
4 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
5 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
6 Click Add.

Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.

1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
• Print
• Print and Forward
• Forward

Faxing

4 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
• Fax
• E‑mail
• FTP
• LDSS
• eSF
5 In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.

6 Click Submit.

132

Scanning to an FTP address

133

Scanning to an FTP address
ADF

Scanner glass

media (such as magazine clippings).

• Load legal- and A3- size documents into the ADF facedown,
short edge first.

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut. An FTP destination could also be another PostScript printer; for example, a color document can
be scanned, and then sent to a color printer.

Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the scanner control panel each time you want to send a document
to an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods
for creating shortcut numbers: using a computer and using the scanner touch screen.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then get one from your system
support person.

Scanning to an FTP address

134

4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Enter the appropriate information.
6 Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

7 Click Add.

Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > type the FTP address >

> enter a name for the shortcut > Done

2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.

3 Touch Submit.

Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the touch screen
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It

Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press

, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.

4 Touch Send It.

Scanning to an FTP address

135

Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP >

> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Done

Understanding FTP options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy).

File Name
This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.

Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending.

• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with the new setting
displayed.

Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.

• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.

• JPEG—Creates and attaches a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most Web browsers
and graphics programs

• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer

Scanning to an FTP address

136

Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.

Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your files will turn out in relation to the original document.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned.

• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides and Binding settings
to match the orientation.

• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Scanning to an FTP address

137

Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:

• ADF Skew Fix—Use to correct slight skew in the scanned image.
• Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan edge to edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature image output
settings before you send the document.

• Edge Erase—Use to eliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.

• Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

138

Scanning to a computer or flash drive
ADF

Scanner glass

media (such as magazine clippings).

• Load legal- and A3- size documents into the ADF facedown,
short edge first.

The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or to a flash drive. The computer does not have to be
directly connected to the printer for you to receive Scan to PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer
over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer, and then downloading the profile to the printer.

Scanning to a computer
1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Navigate to:
Scan Profile > Create > select the scan settings > Next

3 Select a location in your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
4 Type a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.

5 Click Submit.
A shortcut number is automatically assigned when you click Submit. You can use this shortcut number when you
are ready to scan your documents.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

139

6 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen:
a Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
c Press

, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and
then touch Profiles.

d After entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.

7 View the file from your computer.

Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document facedown into the ADF or on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the side of the scanner control panel.
The USB Drive home screen appears.

4 Select the destination folder, and then navigate to:
Scan to USB drive > adjust the scan settings > Scan It

Understanding the Scan Center features
The Scan Center software lets you modify scan settings and select where to send the scanned output. Scan settings
modified with the Scan Center software can be saved and used for other scan jobs.
The following features are available:

•
•
•
•
•

Scan and send images to your computer
Convert scanned images to text
Preview the scanned image and adjust the brightness and contrast
Make larger scans without losing detail
Scan two‑sided documents

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

140

Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility to create scan‑to‑PC profiles. The ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from
the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

1 Set up a scan‑to‑PC profile:
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the scanner you want to use.
If no scanners are listed, then contact your system support person to obtain a list, or click Setup to manually
search for an IP address or host name.

c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind
of output you want to create.

d Select any of the following:
• Show MFP Instructions—View or print the final directions.
• Create Shortcut—Save this group of settings to use again.
e Click Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.

2 Scan original documents:
a Load original documents in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the scanner control panel, navigate to:
Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit
Note: The scanned image is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.

Understanding scan profile options
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan
an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).

Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.

Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

141

Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.

Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.

• Sides (Duplex)— Use this to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on
both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.

• Orientation— Use this to specify the orientation of the original document, and then change Sides and Binding to
match the orientation.

• Binding— Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge of the page.

Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.

Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:

• ADF Skew Fix— Use this to correct slight skew in the scanned image.
• Advanced Imaging— Use this to change or adjust Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast,
JPEG Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature before
scanning a document.

• Custom Job—Use this to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job.

Scanning to a computer or flash drive

142

• Edge Erase—Use this to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to
eliminate an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever
is within the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image.

• Transmission Log—Use this to print the transmission log or transmission error log.

Understanding printer menus

143

Understanding printer menus
Menus list
Supplies

Paper Menu

Reports

Settings

Replace Supply
Separator Pad

Default Source
Paper Size/Type

Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics

General Settings
Copy Settings

Pick Roller

Configure MP

Network Setup Page

Fax Settings

Envelope Enhance

Network [x] Setup Page E‑mail Settings

Substitute Size

Shortcut List

FTP Settings

Paper Texture

Fax Job Log

Flash Drive

Paper Weight

Fax Call Log

Print Settings

Paper Loading

Copy Shortcuts

Custom Types
Custom Names

E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts

Custom Scan Sizes

FTP Shortcuts

Custom Bin Names

Profiles List

Universal Setup

Print Fonts

Bin Setup

Print Directory
Asset Report

Security

Network/Ports

Help

Manage Shortcuts

Edit Security Setups

Active NIC

Print All Guides

Fax Shortcuts

Copy Guide

E-mail Shortcuts

[x]1

Miscellaneous Security Settings

Network

Confidential Print

Standard USB

E-mail Guide

FTP Shortcuts

Disk Wiping

Parallel [x]

Fax Guide

Copy Shortcuts

Security Audit Log

Serial [x]

FTP Guide

Profile Shortcuts

Set Date and Time

SMTP Setup

Print Defects Guide
Information Guide

Option Card Menu2

Lock Scanner Head3

A list of installed DLEs (Download
Emulators) appears.

Instructions for locking the scan bar will
appear

Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].

This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.

This menu appears only on scanners that have a scan bar locking mechanism.

Understanding printer menus

144

Supplies menu
Menu item

Description

Replace Supply
Separator Pad
Pick Roller

Provides the option to reset the supply counter for the
separator pad and pick roller

Separator Pad
OK
Replace

Shows the status of the separator pad

Pick Roller
OK
Replace

Shows the status of the pick roller

• Select Yes to reset the supply counter.
• Select No to exit.

Paper menu
Default Source menu
Menu item

Description

Default Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope

Sets a default paper source for all print jobs
Notes:

• From the Paper menu, Configure MP feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP feeder to appear as a menu setting.

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• Envelope Feeder only appears if an envelope feeder is supported and
installed.

Understanding printer menus

145

Paper Size/Type menu
Menu item

Description

Tray [x] Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
A4
A5
JIS B5

Specifies the paper size loaded in each tray

Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type [x]

Specifies the type of paper loaded in each tray

Notes:

• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• For trays with automatic size sensing, only the size detected by the
hardware appears.

• If the same size and type of paper are in two trays and the Paper Size
and Paper Type settings match, then the trays are automatically linked.
When one tray is empty, the print job uses the linked tray.

Notes:

• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.

• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
• Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.

Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

Understanding printer menus

146

Menu item

Description

MP Feeder Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5

Specifies the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder

MP Feeder Type
Custom Type [x]
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper

Specifies the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder

Notes:

• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu.

Notes:

• Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for

Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu.

Understanding printer menus

147

Menu item

Description

Envelope Feeder Size
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope

Specifies the size of the envelope being loaded in the envelope feeder

Envelope Feeder Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]

Specifies the type of the envelope being loaded in the envelope feeder

Manual Paper Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5

Specifies the size of the paper being manually loaded

Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton Paper
Custom Type [x]

Specifies the type of paper being manually loaded

Note: This menu appears only when a supported envelope feeder is
installed.

Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.

Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

Understanding printer menus

148

Menu item

Description

Manual Envelope Size
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope

Specifies the size of the envelope being manually loaded

Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]

Specifies the type of envelope being manually loaded

Default ADF Media Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored
Light
Heavy
Rough/Cotton
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Difficult Media Tabloid
Difficult Media A3
Custom Scan Size [x]

Specifies the type of paper being loaded in the ADF

Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.

Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• The Difficult Media Letter, Difficult Media Legal, and Difficult Media
Tabloid menus appear only when the scanner measurement unit is set
to US.

• The Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media A4, and Difficult Media A3

Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.

menus appear only when the scanner measurement unit is set to
Metric.

Understanding printer menus

149

Configure MP menu
Menu item

Description

Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
First

Determines when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder
Notes:

• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.

• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
• If Manual or First is selected, and Paper Source or Separator Sheet Source
is set to MPF, then these values automatically change to Tray 1.

Envelope Enhance
The envelope conditioner significantly reduces the wrinkling of some envelopes.
Menu item

Description

Envelope Enhance
Off
1 (Least)
2
3
4
5
6 (Most)

Enables or disables the envelope conditioner
Notes:

• The factory default setting is 5.
• If noise reduction is more important than wrinkle reduction, then
decrease the setting.

Substitute Size menu
Menu item

Description

Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed

Substitutes a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available
Notes:

• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.

• The Off setting indicates no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a substitution lets the job print without a Change Paper message
appearing.

Understanding printer menus

150

Paper Texture menu
Menu item

Description

Plain Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray

Card Stock Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the card stock loaded in a specific tray

Transparency Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the transparencies loaded in a specific tray

Recycled Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded in a specific tray

Labels Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the labels loaded in a specific tray

Vinyl Labels Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the vinyl labels loaded in a specific tray

Bond Texture
Rough
Smooth
Normal

Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray

Envelope Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the envelopes loaded in a specific tray

Rough Envelope Texture
Rough

Specifies the relative texture of the rough envelopes loaded in a specific tray

Letterhead Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

151

Menu item

Description

Preprinted Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray

Colored Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray

Light Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray

Heavy Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray

Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough

Specifies the relative texture of the paper loaded in a specific tray

Custom [x] Texture
Normal
Rough
Smooth

Specifies the relative texture of the custom paper loaded in a specific tray

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Paper Weight menu
Menu item

Description

Plain Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the plain paper loaded

Card Stock Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the card stock loaded

Transparency Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the transparencies loaded

Heavy Glossy Weight
Heavy

Specifies the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if card stock is supported.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

152

Menu item

Description

Labels Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the labels loaded

Vinyl Labels Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of vinyl labels loaded

Bond Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the bond paper loaded

Envelope Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded

Rough Envelope Weight
Heavy
Light
Normal

Specifies the relative weight of the envelopes loaded

Letterhead Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the letterhead loaded

Preprinted Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded

Colored Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the colored paper loaded

Light Weight
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded

Heavy Weight
Heavy

Specifies the relative weight of the paper loaded

Rough/Cotton Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.

Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Note: Light is the factory default setting.
Note: Heavy is the factory default setting.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

153

Menu item

Description

Custom [x] Weight
Normal
Heavy
Light

Specifies the relative weight of the custom paper loaded
Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting.
• Settings appear only if the custom type is supported.

Paper Loading menu
Menu item

Description

Card Stock Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Card Stock as the paper type

Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type

Labels Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type

Vinyl Labels Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Vinyl Labels as the paper type

Bond Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type

Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type

Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type

Colored Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type

Light Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Light as the paper type

Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Duplex sets the printer default to 2‑sided printing for every print job unless 1‑sided printing is selected from Print
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.

Understanding printer menus

154

Menu item

Description

Rough Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Rough as the paper type

Custom Loading
Duplex
Off

Determines whether 2‑sided printing occurs for all jobs that specify
Custom as the paper type

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Custom Loading is available only if the custom type is
supported.
Note: Duplex sets the printer default to 2‑sided printing for every print job unless 1‑sided printing is selected from Print
Properties in Windows or the Print dialog in Macintosh.

Custom Types menu
Menu item

Description

Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope

Associates a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom
Type [x] name or a user‑defined Custom Name created from the Embedded
Web Server or from MarkVisionTM Professional

Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope

Specifies a paper type when Recycled is selected in other menus

Notes:

• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.

Notes:

• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom media type must be supported by the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.

Custom Names menu
Menu item

Definition

Custom Name [x]
[none]

Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces the Custom
Type [x] name in the printer menus.

Understanding printer menus

155

Custom Scan Sizes menu
Menu item

Description

Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Media Type
Paper
Card Stock
Letterhead
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Bond
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Custom Type [x]
ADF Media Type
Width
1–11.69 inches (25–297 mm)
Height
1–17 inches (25–432 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side of output
Off
On

Specifies a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan
size name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Notes:

• The default custom scan size is empty.
• An empty Scan Size Name value appears on the panel as Custom Scan
Size 4–6.

• Custom Scan Size 1–3 will appear as Difficult Media Letter, Difficult
Media Legal, and Difficult Media Tabloid if the scanner is set to US.

• Custom Scan Size 1–3 will appear as Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media
A4, and Difficult Media A3 if the scanner is set to Metric.

• The custom scan size name can have a maximum of 64 characters.
• Paper is the factory default setting for Media Type unless indicated
otherwise.

• For Difficult Media Letter, the US factory default setting is 11 inches for
Width, 8.5 inches for Height, and Rough/Cotton for Media Type.

• For Difficult Media Legal, the US factory default setting is 8.5 inches for
Width, 14 inches for Height, and Rough/Cotton for Media Type.

• For Difficult Media Tabloid, the US factory default setting is 11 inches for
Width, 17 inches for Height, and Rough/Cotton for Media Type.

• For Difficult Media A5, the international factory default setting is
210 mm for Width, 148 mm for Height, and Rough/Cotton for Media
Type.

• For Difficult Media A4, the international factory default setting is
297 mm for Width, 210 mm for Height, and Rough/Cotton for Media
Type.

• For Difficult Media A3, the international factory default setting is
297 mm for Width, 420 mm for Height, and Rough/Cotton for Media
Type.

• For Custom Scan Size 4–6, the factory default setting is 11.69 inches
(297 mm) for Height and 17 inches (432 mm) for Height.

• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side of output.”

Custom Bin Names menu
Menu Item

Description

Standard Bin

Specifies a custom name for the Standard Bin

Bin [x]

Specifies a custom name for Bin [x]

Understanding printer menus

156

Universal Setup menu
These menus are used to specify the height, width, and feed direction of the Universal Paper Size. The Universal Paper
Size is a user‑defined paper size setting. It is listed with the other paper size settings and includes similar options, such
as support for duplex printing and printing multiple pages on one sheet.
Menu item

Description

Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters

Identifies the units of measure

Portrait Width
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm

Sets the portrait width

Notes:

• Inches is the US factory default setting.
• Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Notes:

• If the width exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum
width allowed.

• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased
in 0.01‑inch increments.

• 216 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm

Sets the portrait height
Notes:

• If the height exceeds the maximum, the printer uses the maximum
height allowed.

• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. Inches can be increased in
0.01‑inch increments.

• 356 mm is the international factory default setting. Millimeters can
be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge

Specifies the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction
Notes:

• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only if the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.

Bin Setup menu
Menu item

Description

Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specifies the default exit bin
Note: Standard Bin is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

157

Menu item

Description

Configure Bins
Mailbox
Link
Mail Overflow
Link Optional
Type Assignment

Specifies configuration options for exit bins
Notes:

• Mailbox is the factory default setting. This setting
treats each bin as a separate mailbox.

• Link configures all available bins as one large exit bin.
• Mail Overflow configures each exit bin as a separate
mailbox.

• Link Optional links together all available exit bins
except the standard bin and only appears when at
least two optional bins are installed.

• Type Assignment assigns each paper type to an exit
bin or linked bin set.

• Bins assigned the same name are automatically
linked unless Link Optional is selected.
Overflow Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specifies an alternative exit bin when a designated bin is
full
Notes:

• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• If multiple exit bins are assigned the same name,
then the name only appears once in the exit bin list.

• [x] can be any number between 1 and 10 if the
appropriate optional exit bins are installed.
Assign Type/Bin
Plain Paper Bin
Card Stock Bin
Transparency Bin
Recycled Bin
Labels Bin
Vinyl Labels Bin
Bond Bin
Envelope Bin
Rough Envelope Bin
Letterhead Bin
Preprinted Bin
Colored Bin
Light Paper Bin
Heavy Paper Bin
Rough/Cotton Bin
Custom [x] Bin

Selects an exit bin for each supported paper type
Available selections for each type are:
Disabled
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Notes:

• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• [x] can be any number between 1 and 10 if the
appropriate optional exit bins are installed.

• If multiple exit bins are assigned the same name,
then the name only appears once in the exit bin list.

Understanding printer menus

158

Reports menu
Reports menu
Menu item

Description

Menu Settings Page

Prints a report containing information about the paper loaded into trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, scanner control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information

Device Statistics

Prints a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages

Network Setup Page

Prints a report containing information about the network scanner settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Note: This menu appears only in network scanners or scanners connected to
print servers.

Network [x] Setup Page

Prints a report containing information about the network scanner settings, such
as the TCP/IP address information
Notes:

• This menu appears only when there is more than one network option
installed.

• This menu appears only in network scanners or scanners connected to
print servers.
Shortcut List

Prints a report containing information about configured shortcuts

Fax Job Log

Prints a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes
Note: This menu appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.

Fax Call Log

Prints a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received,
and blocked calls
Note: This menu appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.

Copy Shortcuts

Prints a report containing information about copy shortcuts

E‑mail Shortcuts

Prints a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts

Fax Shortcuts

Prints a report containing information about fax shortcuts

FTP Shortcuts

Prints a report containing information about FTP shortcuts

Profiles List

Prints a list of profiles stored in the scanner

Print Fonts

Prints a report of all the fonts available for the language currently set in the
scanner

Understanding printer menus

159

Menu item

Description

Print Directory

Prints a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or scanner
hard disk
Notes:

• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or scanner hard disk is installed
correctly and working.
Asset Report

Prints a report containing asset information including the scanner serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned
into an asset database.

Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Menu item

Description

Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only if an optional network card is installed.

Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu; all inactive ports are omitted.
Menu item

Description

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the scanner to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the scanner does not examine incoming data. The scanner
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the scanner to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the scanner does not examine incoming data. The scanner
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.

Understanding printer menus

160

Menu item

Description

NPA Mode
Auto
Off

Sets the scanner to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]

Sets the size of the network input buffer
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the
scanner, the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set
to On or Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily stores print jobs on the scanner hard disk before printing. This menu
only appears if a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the scanner hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the scanner is busy processing data from
another input port.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off

Sets the scanner to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.

Understanding printer menus

161

Menu item

Description

Standard Network Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk

Displays and sets network settings
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the scanner is connected to a
wireless network.

Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk

Network Reports menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network Setup > Reports or Network
Reports
Menu item

Description

Print Setup Page Prints a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address

Network Card menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Menu item

Description

View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected

Lets you view the connection status of the network card

View Card Speed

Lets you view the speed of a currently active network card

Network Address
UAA
LAA

Lets you view the network addresses

Understanding printer menus

162

Menu item

Description

Job Timeout

Sets the amount of time in seconds before a network print job is canceled.

0, 10–255

Notes:

• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• A value of 1–9 is considered invalid and prompts the screen to return to
the Network Card menu without saving the new value.
Banner Page

Allows the printer to print a banner page.

Off

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

TCP/IP menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.
Menu item

Description

Activate
On
Off

Activates TCP/IP

Set Hostname

Lets you set the current TCP/IP host name

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address

Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP address
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.

Netmask

Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP netmask

Gateway

Lets you view or change the current TCP/IP gateway

Enable DHCP
On
Off

Specifies the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting

Enable RARP
On
Off

Specifies the RARP address assignment setting

Enable BOOTP
On
Off

Specifies the BOOTP address assignment setting

Enable AutoIP
Yes
No

Specifies the Zero Configuration Networking setting

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

163

Menu item

Description

Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No

Enables the built-in FTP server, which allows you to send files to the scanner using File
Transfer Protocol.

Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No

Enables the built-in web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the scanner
can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.

WINS Server Address

Lets you view or change the current WINS server address

Enable DDNS
Yes
No

Lets you view or change the current DDNS setting

Enable mDNS
Yes
No

Lets you view or change the current mDNS setting

DNS Server Address

Lets you view or change the current DNS server address

Backup DNS Server Address

Lets you view or change the backup DNS server addresses.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No

Lets you view or change the current HTTPS setting
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

IPv6 menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only for network models or printers attached to print servers.
Menu item

Description

Enable IPv6
On
Off

Enables IPv6 in the printer

Auto Configuration
On
Off

Specifies whether the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router

Set Hostname

Lets you set the hostname

View Address

Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.

View Router Address

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

164

Menu item

Description

Enable DHCPv6
On
Off

Enables DHCPv6 in the printer
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Wireless menu
Use the following menu to view or configure the wireless internal print server settings.
Note: This menu is available only for models connected to a wireless network.
The Wireless menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Menu item

Description

Wi-Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button
Method
Start PIN Method

Lets you connect the printer to a wireless network by pressing buttons on
both the scanner and the access point (wireless router) within a given
period of time

Enable/Disable WPS Autodetection
Disable
Enable

Automatically detects the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses— WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) or WPS Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.

Network Mode

Specifies the network mode

BSS Type
Ad hoc
Infrastructure

Notes:

• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless
connection directly between the printer and a computer.

• Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access
point.
Compatibility
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g

Specifies the wireless standard for the wireless network

Choose Network
[list of available networks]

Lets you select an available network for the printer to use

View Signal Quality

Lets you view the quality of the wireless connection

View Security Mode

Lets you view the encryption method that a wireless network uses

Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.

Note: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a simple and secure configuration that allows you to establish a wireless
network and enable network security without requiring prior knowledge of Wi‑Fi technology. It is no longer
necessary to configure the network name (SSID) and WEP key or WPA passphrase for network devices.

AppleTalk menu
This menu is available from the Network/Ports menu:
Network/Ports > Standard Network or Network [x] > Standard Network Setup or Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk

Understanding printer menus

165

Menu item

Description

Activate
Yes
No

Activates AppleTalk support

View Name

Shows the assigned AppleTalk name

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
View Address

Shows the assigned AppleTalk address
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.

Set Zone
Provides a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network
[default]
Note: When “default” is selected, the printer uses the AppleTalk zone that the
[list of zones available on the network] router identifies as the default zone for the network. If no default zone exists,
then the zone marked with an * is the default setting.

Standard USB menu
Menu item

Description

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the scanner to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the scanner does not examine incoming data. The scanner
uses PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the scanner to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the scanner does not examine incoming data. The scanner
uses PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off

Sets the scanner to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the scanner to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding printer menus

166

Menu item

Description

USB Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled

Sets the size of the USB input buffer
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the scanner hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the scanner,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily stores print jobs on the scanner hard disk before printing
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers jobs on the scanner hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the scanner is busy processing data from another
input port.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off

Sets the scanner to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs

ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the network address information for an external print server

ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the netmask information for an external print server

ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the gateway information for an external print server

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Note: This menu appears only if the scanner is attached to an external print server
through the USB port.
Note: This menu appears only if the scanner is attached to an external print server
through the USB port.
Note: This menu appears only if the scanner is attached to an external print server
through the USB port.

Understanding printer menus

167

Parallel [x] menu
Menu item

Description

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the scanner to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the scanner does not examine incoming data. The scanner
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the scanner to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the scanner does not examine incoming data. The scanner
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off

Sets the scanner to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Parallel Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled

Sets the size of the parallel input buffer
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the
scanner hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.

• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the scanner,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding printer menus

168

Menu item

Description

Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily stores print jobs on the scanner hard disk before printing
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the scanner hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the scanner is busy processing data from
another input port.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
On
Off

Enables bidirectional communication through the parallel port

Protocol
Fastbytes
Standard

Specifies the parallel port protocol

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Notes:

• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.

• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
Off
On

Determines if the scanner honors hardware initialization requests from the computer
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.

Parallel Mode 2
On
Off

Determines if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe

Mac Binary PS
Auto
On
Off

Sets the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs

ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the network address information for an external print server

ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the netmask information for an external print server

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: This menu is available only if the scanner is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Note: This menu appears only when the scanner is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

Understanding printer menus

169

Menu item

Description

ENA gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy

Sets the gateway information for an external print server
Note: This menu appears only when the scanner is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.

Serial [x] menu
Menu item

Description

PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the scanner to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the scanner does not examine incoming data. The scanner
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off

Sets the scanner to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the scanner does not examine incoming data. The scanner
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
Auto
On
Off

Sets the scanner to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the scanner to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.

• When set to On, the scanner performs NPA processing. If the data is not in
NPA format, it is rejected as bad data.

• When set to Off, the scanner does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.

Understanding printer menus

170

Menu item

Description

Serial Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Disabled

Sets the size of the serial input buffer
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.

• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the scanner,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.

• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto

Temporarily stores print jobs on the scanner hard disk before printing
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. The scanner does not buffer print jobs on the
scanner hard disk.

• On buffers print jobs on the scanner hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the scanner is busy processing data from
another input port.

• Changing this setting from the scanner control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the scanner to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
DTR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR

Robust XON
Off
On

Selects the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port
Notes:

•
•
•
•

DTR is the factory default setting.
DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.

Determines whether the scanner communicates availability to the computer
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.

Understanding printer menus

171

Menu item

Description

Baud
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
1200
2400
4800

Specifies the rate at which data can be received through the serial port

Data Bits
8
7

Specifies the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame

Parity
None
Ignore
Even
Odd

Sets the parity for serial input and output data frames

Honor DSR
Off
On

Determines whether the scanner uses the DSR Signal

Notes:

• 9600 is the factory default setting.
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.

Note: 8 is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.

SMTP Setup menu
Menu item

Description

Primary SMTP Gateway

Specifies SMTP server gateway and port information

Primary SMTP Gateway Port

Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.

Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30

Specifies the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail
Note: 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

Reply Address

Specifies a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer

Understanding printer menus

172

Menu item

Description

Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required

Sets the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server
Notes:

• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.

SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5

Specifies the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges

Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials

Specifies what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.

Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.

Notes:

User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User

• None is the factory default setting for Device and User‑Initiated
E‑mail.

• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.

Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain

Security menu
Editing Security Setups menu
Menu item

Description

Edit Backup Password

Creates a backup password
Note: This menu item will only appear if a backup password exists.

Edit Building Blocks

Edits the Internal Accounts, NTLM, various Setups, Password, and PIN

Edit Security Templates

Adds or edits a Security Template

Edit Access Controls

Controls access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points

Understanding printer menus

173

Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Menu item

Description

Limits the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the scanner control
panel before all users are locked out
Notes:

• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1–10. 3 attempts is the factory default setting.

• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.

• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory
default setting. 1 indicates the scanner does not impose a lockout time.

• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the scanner remains idle on the
home screen before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–
900 seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.

• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging the user off. Settings range from 1–120 seconds.
10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Reset factory security defaults

Changes the value of the security settings
Notes:

• Access controls=”No Security” retains all the security information that the user
has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.

• “No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the device’s security
configuration.

• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and assigns the factory default value to each setting in the
Miscellaneous Security Settings section of both the scanner control panel and
the Web page.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never

Allows the user to request a server certificate
Notes:

• “Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated
immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.

• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.

• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored and the session proceeds normally.

• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16

Limits the digit length of the PIN.
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

174

Confidential Print menu
Menu item

Description

Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10

Limits the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective scanner hard disk is
installed.

• Once the limit is reached, the print job for that user name and that PIN are
deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Limits the amount of time a “confidential” print job is saved before it is deleted

Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Limits the amount of time a “repeat” print job is saved before it is deleted

Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Limits the amount of time a “verify” print job is saved before it is deleted

Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week

Limits the amount of time a “reserve” print job is saved before it is deleted

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• If the scanner is turned off, then all “confidential” print jobs held in the
scanner are deleted.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• If the scanner is turned off, then all “repeat” print jobs held in the scanner are
deleted.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• If the scanner is turned off, then all “verify” print jobs held in the scanner are
deleted.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• If the scanner is turned off, then all ”reserve” print jobs held in the scanner are
deleted.

Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data on the scanner hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All
permanent data on the scanner hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective hard disk is installed.

Understanding printer menus

175

Menu item

Description

Wiping Mode
Auto
Manual
Off

Specifies the mode for disk wiping
Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Due to the large amount of resources required for Automatic Wiping,
activating this option may decrease printer performance, especially if the
printer requires hard disk space faster than it can be wiped and returned to
service.

Scheduled Wiping
Time
0000–2300
Day(s)
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Every day (Mon-Sun)
Weekdays (Mon-Fri)
Weekends (Sat-Sun)

Specifies times and days for disk wiping

Manual Wiping
Do not start now
Start now

Overwrites all disk space that has been used to hold data from a print job that has
been processed (printed). This type of wipe does not erase any information related
to an unprocessed print job.

Note: This setting does not appear when Wiping Mode is set to Off or Auto.

Notes:

• “Do not start now” is the factory default setting.
• If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully
authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk
wipe.

• This menu does not appear when Wiping Mode is set to Off.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass

Marks all disk space used by a previous print job and does not permit the file system
to reuse this space until it has been cleared
Notes:

• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only Automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to
turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.

• Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass
method.

Understanding printer menus

176

Menu item

Description

Manual Method
Single pass
Multiple pass

Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first
Notes:

• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• This menu will not appear if Wiping Mode is set to “Off” or “Auto”.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using only the Multiple pass
method.

Scheduled Method
Single pass
Multiple pass

Allows the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first
Notes:

• Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or
confirmation message.

Security Audit Log menu
Menu item

Description

Export Log

Enables an authorized user to export the audit log
Notes:

• To export the audit log from the scanner control panel, a flash drive must be
attached to the scanner.

• Download the audit log from the Embedded Web Server.
Delete Log
Yes
No

Specifies whether audit logs are deleted
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

Menu item

177

Description

Configure Log
Specifies whether and how audit logs are created
Enable Audit
Notes:
No
• Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
Yes
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
Enable Remote Syslog
• Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
No
factory default setting.
Yes
• Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
Remote Syslog Server
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
Remote Syslog Port
• Remote Syslog Port identifies the port where the device transmits logged
Remote Syslog Method
events to a remote server.
Normal UDP
• Remote Syslog Method identifies the protocol used by the device to transmit
Stunnel
logged events to a remote server.
Remote Syslog Facility
• Log full behavior determines whether the device automatically overwrites
0–23
logged events when it requires additional memory to save current events.
Log full behavior
• Admin's e‑mail address may contain a single e‑mail address or multiple
Wrap over oldest entries
addresses separated by a comma.
E‑mail log then delete all
• “Digitally sign exports” determines whether the device automatically signs
entries
each exported security log.
Admin's e‑mail address
• “Remote Syslog non‑logged events” determines whether the device sends
Digitally sign exports
events to the remote server that has a severity level greater than the value
Off
entered.
On
• “E‑mail % full alert” enables the device to send an e‑mail to the administrator
Severity of events to log
if the fills a certain amount of memory space.
0–7
• With the security audit log activated, the severity value of each event is
Remote Syslog non‑logged
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
events
No
Yes
E‑mail log cleared alert
No
Yes
E‑mail log wrapped alert
No
Yes
E‑mail % full alert
No
Yes
% full alert level
1 ‑ 99
E‑mail log exported alert
No
Yes
E‑mail log settings changed alert
No
Yes
Log line endings
LF (\n)
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)

Understanding printer menus

178

Set Date and Time menu
Menu item

Description

Current Date and Time

Lets you view the current date and time settings for the printer

Manually Set Date and Time
[input date and time]

Note: Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.

Time Zone
[list of time zones]

Note: GMT is the factory default setting.

Automatically Observe DST
On
Off

Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.

Custom Time Zone Setup
UTC Offset
DST Start Week
DST Start Day
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset

Enables the user to setup the time zone

Enable NTP
On
Off

Enables Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network

NTP Server
[NTP Server Address]

Lets you view the NTP Server Address

Enable Authentication
Off
On

Lets you change the authentication setting to On or Off

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

179

Settings menu
General Settings menu
Menu item

Description

Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese

Sets the language of the text appearing on the display

Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper

Minimizes the use of energy, paper, or specialty media

Note: All languages may not be available for all models.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the scanner to its
factory default settings.

• Energy minimizes the power used by the scanner.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.

• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.

• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
ADF Multi-feed Sensor
On
Off

Specifies whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Allows the scanner to detect when the ADF picks more than one
sheet of paper at once
Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

180

Menu item

Description

Quiet Mode
Off
On

Reduces the amount of noise produced by the scanner
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the
performance specifications for your scanner.

• On configures the scanner to produce as little noise as
possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and line
art.

• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.

• Selecting Photo from the driver may disable Quiet Mode and
provide better print quality and full speed printing.
Run Initial setup
Yes
No

Instructs the scanner to run the setup wizard
Notes:

• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
Country select screen, the default becomes No.

Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkish
Czech
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]

Specifies a language and custom key information for the scanner
control panel keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent
marks and symbols from the printer control panel keyboard.

Understanding printer menus

181

Menu item

Description

Paper Sizes
US
Metric

Specifies the unit of measurement for paper sizes
Notes:

• US is the factory default setting.
• Initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.

Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]

Specifies a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.

Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]

Specifies what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of
the home screen
For the Left side and Right side options, select from the following
options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Custom Text [x]
Model Name
Notes:

• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner

Lets you customize the displayed information for Black Toner
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:

• Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.

• Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display.

Understanding printer menus

182

Menu item

Description

Displayed Information (continued)
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors

Lets you customize the displayed information for Paper Jam, Load
Paper, and Service Errors
Select from the following options:
Display
No
Yes
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:

• No is the factory default setting for Display.
• Default is the factory default setting for Message to Display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites

Lets you change the icons and buttons that appear on the home
screen

Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD

Formats the scanner date

Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock

Formats the scanner time

Screen Brightness
20–100

Specifies the brightness of the scanner control panel screen

Available selections for each icon or button are:
Do not display
Display

Understanding printer menus

183

Menu item

Description

One Page Copy
Off
On

Sets the copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time

Output Lighting
Normal/Standby Mode
Off
Dim
Bright

Sets the amount of light from the standard exit bin

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• If Eco-Mode is set to Energy or Energy/Paper, then the
factory default setting is Dim.

• If Eco-Mode is Off or set to Paper, then the factory default
setting is Bright.

Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10

Specifies whether icons and buttons have audio feedback

Tactile Touchscreen Feedback
On
Off

Specifies whether the scanner control panel has touch sensation
feedback

Show Bookmarks
Yes
No

Specifies whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area

Allow Background Removal
On
Off

Specifies whether image background is removed in copy, fax,
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs

Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off

Lets you scan multiple jobs to one file

Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level

Specifies how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam
occurs in the ADF

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting. When Yes is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.

Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
image will be removed.
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.

Notes:

• If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned
if any pages jam.

• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300

Specifies the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.

Contact Name

Specifies a contact name for the scanner
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.

Understanding printer menus

184

Menu item

Description

Location

Specifies the location of the scanner
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.

Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Staple Alarm

Sets an alarm to sound when the scanner or printer requires user
intervention
Available selections for each alarm type are:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:

• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single
sounds three quick beeps.

• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. Off
means no alarm will sound.

• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
1–240
Disabled

Specifies the number of minutes of inactivity before the system
enters a lower power state

Timeouts
Sleep Mode
1–240 min
Disabled

Sets the amount of time the scanner waits after a job is printed
before it goes into a reduced power state

Note: 15 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• “30 min” is the factory default setting.
• Disabled appears only when Energy Conserve is set to Off.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.

• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300 sec

Sets the amount of time in seconds the scanner waits before
returning the display to a ready state

Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255 sec

Sets the amount of time in seconds the scanner waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print job

Note: “30 sec” is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• “90 sec” is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the scanner checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.

• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.

Understanding printer menus

185

Menu item

Description

Timeouts
Wait Timeout
15–65535 sec
Disabled

Sets the amount of time in seconds the scanner waits for additional
data before canceling a print job
Notes:

• “40 sec” is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the scanner is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.

Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255 sec

Sets the amount of time the scanner waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue
Notes:

• “30 sec” is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a scanner hard disk is
installed.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255

Lets the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period

Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
Auto
On
Off

Specifies whether the printer reprints jammed pages

Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.

• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On

Lets the printer successfully print a page that may not have printed
otherwise
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.

• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button
Sleep
Do nothing

Determines how the scanner, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button

Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do nothing
Sleep

Determines how the scanner, while in Idle state, reacts to a long
press of the Sleep button

Note: Sleep is the factory default setting.

Note: Do nothing is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

186

Menu item

Description

Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now

Returns the scanner settings to the factory default settings
Notes:

• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore
keeps the user‑defined settings.

• Restore Now returns all scanner settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in
flash memory or on a hard disk are not affected.

Copy Settings menu
Menu item

Description

Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics

Specifies the content of the original document

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specifies how the original document was produced

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided

Specifies whether an original document is duplex (two‑sided) or simplex (onesided), and then specifies whether the copy should be duplex or simplex

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on one side and the
copy will also have printing on one side.

• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on one side while
the copy will have printing on both sides. For example, if the original
document is six sheets, the copy is three sheets with printing on both
sides.

• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original page has printing on both sides while
the copy will have printing on only one side. For example, if the
original document is three sheets, then the copy is six sheets with
printing on only one side.

• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original page has printing on both sides, and
the copy will also have printing on both sides.

Understanding printer menus

187

Menu item

Description

Paper Saver
Off
2-up Portrait
4-up Portrait
2-up Landscape
4-up Landscape

Allows copying two or four sheets of a document on one page

Print Page Borders
Off
On

Specifies whether a page border is printed

Collate
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]

Keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple
copies

Staple
Off
On

Sends print jobs to the staple finisher

Note: This menu appears only when a
finisher is installed.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number of sheets that could be stapled varies depending on the
paper type.

Understanding printer menus

188

Menu item

Description

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Difficult Media Tabloid
Difficult Media A3
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card

Specifies the paper size of the original document

Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder

Specifies the paper source for copy jobs

Transparency Separators
On
Off

Places a sheet of paper between transparencies

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Places a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or copy jobs

Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specifies the separator sheet source

Notes:

• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• Difficult Media Letter, Difficult Media Legal, and Difficult Media
Tabloid will appear only when the scanner is set to US.

• Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media A4, and Difficult Media A3 will
appear only when the scanner is set to Metric.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

189

Menu item

Description

Darkness
1–9

Specifies the level of darkness for the copy job

Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Determines where the printed copies will exit

Note: This menu appears only when at least
one optional exit bin is installed.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• [x] can be any number between 1 and 10 depending on the number of
optional exit bins installed.

Number of Copies
1–999

Specifies the number of copies for the copy job

Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text

Specifies header/footer information and its location on the page

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
For the location, select from the following options:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Top left
Top middle
Top right
Bottom left
Bottom middle
Bottom right

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”

Overlay
Off
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom

Specifies the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job

Custom Overlay

Specifies the custom overlay text

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
On
Off

Allows interruption of a print job to copy a page or document

Custom Job scanning
Off
On

Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains different paper
sizes

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a scanner hard disk is installed.

Understanding printer menus

190

Menu item

Description

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Lets you save custom copy settings as shortcuts

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy job

Auto Center
Off
On

Lets you automatically center the content on the page

Contrast
Best for Content
0–5

Specifies the contrast used for the copy job

Mirror Image
Off
On

Creates a mirror image of the original document

Negative Image
Off
On

Creates a negative image of the original document

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy job

ADF Skew Fix
Off
On

Corrects slight skew on the scanned image

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Best for Content is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The maximum amount of skew correction that can be applied to the
width of a letter‑ or A4‑size paper is 5%.

• When activated, this function can be applied to any supported scan
size, including custom scan sizes.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge

Sharpness
1–5

Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a copy job

Sample Copy
Off
On

Creates a sample copy of the original document

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job by way of a telephone line.

Understanding printer menus

191

General Fax Settings
Menu item

Description

Station Name

Specifies the name of the fax in the printer

or
Fax Name
Station Number
or

Specifies a number associated with the fax

Fax Number
Station ID
Station Name/Fax Name
Station Number/Fax Number

Specifies how the fax is identified

Enable Manual Fax
Off
On

Sets the printer to fax only manually. This requires a line splitter and a telephone
handset.
Notes:

• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.

• Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use
Equal
Mostly send
All send
All receive
Mostly receive

Defines the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs
Notes:

• Equal is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.

•
•
•
•

“Mostly send” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
“All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
“All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
“Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.

Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow

Specifies whether the printer cancels fax jobs

Caller ID
On
Off
Alternate

Activates caller ID

Note: This menu appears only when
the selected country supports
multiple patterns

Notes:

• Called ID is set to On if the country selected during the initial setup sequence
has a default Caller ID Pattern.

• Alternate appears when the selected country has an alternate Caller ID Pattern
value.

Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right

Specifies the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number

Digits to mask
0–58

Specifies the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number

Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

192

Menu item

Description

Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to field
Off
On
Include from field
Off
On
From
Include Message field
Off
On
Message
Include Logo
Off
On
Include Footer [x]
Off
On
Footer [x]

Configures the fax cover page
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.

Fax Send Settings
Menu item

Description

Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi

Specifies quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives greater print quality,
but increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

193

Menu item

Description

Specifies the paper size of the original document

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specifies how text and graphics are oriented on a page

Notes:

• Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• Difficult Media Letter, Difficult Media Legal, and Difficult Media Tabloid will
appear only when the scanner is set to US.

• Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media A4, and Difficult Media A3 will appear only
when the scanner is set to US.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo

Specifies the content of the original document
Notes:

• Text is the factory default setting. Text is used when the document is mostly
text.

• Graphics is used when the document is composed primarily of images.
• Text/Photo is used when the documents are mostly text or line art.
• Photo is used when the document is a high-quality photograph or inkjet print.

Understanding printer menus

194

Menu item

Description

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specifies how the original document was produced

Darkness
1–9

Lightens or darkens the output

Dial Prefix

Lets you enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.

Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]

Establishes a dialing prefix rule

Automatic Redial
0–9

Specifies the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number

Redial Frequency
1–200

Specifies the number of minutes between redials

Behind a PABX
No
Yes

Enables switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone

Enable ECM
Yes
No

Enables Error Correction Mode for fax jobs

Enable Fax Scans
On
Off

Lets you fax scanned files

Driver to fax
Yes
No

Allows the scanner driver to send fax jobs

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Lets you save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer

Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse

Specifies the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse

Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: 3 minutes is the factory default setting.

Note: Yes is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

195

Menu item

Description

Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

Specifies the maximum speed faxes are sent in baud

Custom Job scanning
Off
On

Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file

Scan Preview
Off
On

Specifies whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy

Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue

Enables an equal balance of colors in the output

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specifies which color to drop during faxing, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout

Contrast
Best for content
0–5

Specifies the contrast of the output

Mirror Image
Off
On

Creates a mirror image of the original document

Negative Image
Off
On

Creates a negative image of the original document

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a fax

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

196

Menu item

Description

ADF Skew Fix
Off
On

Corrects slight skew in the scanned image

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specifies if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing

Sharpness
1–5

Adjusts the sharpness of a fax

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enables the user to specify warm or cool outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use

Enables color faxing

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• On allows the printer to automatically fix skewed ADF files.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.

Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Converts all outgoing faxes to black and white
Faxes
Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off

Fax Receive Settings
Menu item

Description

Enable Fax Receive
On
Off

Allows the printer to receive fax jobs

Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies

Allows the printer to remove queued jobs that request specific unavailable resources
and store them in another queue.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: This menu appears only when
a supported scanner hard disk is
installed.
Rings to Answer
1–25

Specifies the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job

Auto Reduction
On
Off

Scales an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

197

Menu item

Description

Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multi‑Purpose Feeder

Specifies the paper source for printing incoming faxes

Sides (Duplex)
Off
On

Enables duplex (two-sided) printing for incoming fax jobs

Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job

Enables the printer to include separator sheets in the output

Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specifies where the printer will pick the separator sheet

Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Determines the location of the exit bin

Fax Footer
Off
On

Prints the transmission information at the bottom of each page of a received fax

Max Speed
33600
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

Specifies the maximum speed for received faxes in baud

Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward

Enables forwarding of received faxes to another recipient

Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF

Specifies the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded

Forward to Shortcut

Lets you enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail,
FTP, LDSS, or eSF)

Block No Name Fax
Off
On

Enables blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified

Note: [x] can be any number between 1 and 10 if the appropriate optional bins are
installed.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: This item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.

Understanding printer menus

198

Menu item

Description

Banned Fax List

Lets you create a list of banned fax numbers in the printer
Note: When creating the list, separate fax numbers with a semicolon (“;”).

Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Action
Print Faxes
Hold Faxes
Time
0000–2300
Day(s)

Lets you set a schedule for the printer to hold fax jobs

Staple
Off
1 staple

Enables the scanner to send the fax job to the staple finisher.

Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off

Enables the scanner to send and receive fax in color

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Fax Log Settings
Menu item

Description

Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Enables printing of a transmission log after each fax job

Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error

Enables printing of a receive error log following a receive error

Auto Print Logs
On
Off

Enables automatic printing of fax logs

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Selects the source of the paper used for printing logs

Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number

Specifies whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned

Note: Logs print after every 200 jobs.

Understanding printer menus

199

Menu item

Description

Enable Job Log
On
Off

Enables access to the Fax Job log

Enable Call Log
On
Off

Enables access to the Fax Call log

Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Determines where printed fax jobs are sent
Note: [x] can be any number between 1 and 10 if the appropriate optional outputs
are installed.

Speaker Settings
Menu item

Description

Speaker Mode
On until Connected
Always On
Always Off

Notes:

Speaker Volume
High
Low

Controls the volume setting

Ringer Volume
On
Off

Controls the fax speaker ringer volume

• “On until Connected” is the factory default setting. The speaker is on and
issues a sound until the fax connection is made.

• Always On turns the speaker on.
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
Note: High is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Answer On
Menu item
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only

Description
Specifies ring patterns when the device is answering calls
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.

Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.

Understanding printer menus

200

Fax Server Setup
Menu item

Description

To Format

Lets you enter specific fax information using the virtual keyboard on the scanner
control panel

Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup

Specifies SMTP setup information

Primary SMTP Gateway

Specifies SMTP server port information

Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)

Specifies the image type for faxing

Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics

Specifies the content of the original document

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specifies how the original document was produced

Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi

Specifies the resolution level for scanning‑to‑fax

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: Standard is the factory default setting.

Darkness
1–9

Lightens or darkens the output

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specifies the orientation of the scanned image

Note: 5 factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

201

Menu item

Description

Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Tabloid
Folio
Statement
Oficio (México)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A3
A4
A5
A6
JIS B4
JIS B5
Difficult Media Letter
Difficult Media A5
Difficult Media Legal
Difficult Media A4
Difficult Media Tabloid
Difficult Media A3
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.

Specifies the paper size of the original document

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provides an option between saving scan jobs into single-page TIFF files or
multiple‑page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan‑to‑fax job, either one TIFF file is
created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for
each page of the scan job.

Notes:

• Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.

• Difficult Media Letter, Difficult Media Legal, and Difficult Media Tabloid will
appear only when the scanner is set to US.

• Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media A4, and Difficult Media A3 will appear only
when the scanner is set to Metric.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
Off
On

Enables receiving of analog faxes
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

202

E‑mail Settings menu
Menu item

Description

E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name

Specifies e‑mail server information

E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On

Sends a copy of the e-mail back to the sender

E‑mail Server Setup
Max e‑mail size
0–65535 KB

Specifies the maximum e-mail size

E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message

Sends a message when an e-mail is larger than the configured size limit

E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations

Specifies that the e‑mail address contains the domain name, such as a company
domain name

Notes:

• The subject is limited to 255 characters.
• The message is limited to 512 characters.
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.

Note: E-mails larger than the specified maximum size are not sent.

Notes:

• E-mails can be sent only to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File name
Web Link
Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Defines the e‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name .

Specifies the format of the scanned file
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

203

Menu item

Description

PDF Version
1.5
1.6
A‑1a
1.2
1.3
1.4

Sets the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics

Specifies the content of the original document

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specifies how the original document was produced

Color
On
Off

Specifies whether the device scans and e‑mails content in color or in black and white

Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi

Specifies the resolution of the scan in dots per inch

Darkness
1–9

Lightens or darkens the scanned image

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specifies the orientation of the scanned image

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

204

Menu item

Description

Specifies the paper size of the original document

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page

Note:
Notes:

• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.

• Difficult Media Letter, Difficult Media Legal, and Difficult Media Tabloid will
appear only when the scanner is set to US.

• Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media A4, and Difficult Media A3 will appear only
when the scanner is set to Metric.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image
Notes:

•
•
•
•

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.

Understanding printer menus

205

Menu item

Description

Text Default
5–90

Sets the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Sets the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90

Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image

E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link

Specifies how the scanned images will be e‑mailed

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provides an option between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Specifies whether the transmission log prints

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specifies the paper source for printing e-mail logs

Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specifies the exit bin for e‑mail log prints

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: [x] can be any number between 1 and 10 depending on the optional exit bins
installed

Note: This menu appears only when
at least one optional exit bin is
installed.
E‑mail Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit

Enables the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off

Custom Job scanning
Off
On

Lets you copy, in a single copy job, a document that contains different paper sizes

Scan Preview
Off
On

Specifies whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs

Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

206

Menu item

Description

Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Lets you save e-mail addresses as shortcuts
Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
destination screen.

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scanned image

Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue

Enables an equal balance of colors in the output

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout

Contrast
Best for content
0–5

Specifies the contrast of the output

Mirror Image
Off
On

Creates a mirror image of the original document

Negative Image
Off
On

Creates a negative image of the original document

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image

ADF Skew Fix
Off
On

Corrects slight skew in the scanned image

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

207

Menu item

Description

Sharpness
1–5

Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On

Enables the use of the cc: and bcc: fields

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

FTP Settings menu
Menu item

Description

Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Specifies the format of the file for FTP sending

PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A‑1a

Sets the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending

Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics

Specifies the content of the original document

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specifies how the original document was produced

Color
On
Off

Determines if the device captures and transmits content in color or in black and white

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

208

Menu item

Description

Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi

Specifies the resolution of the scan job in dots per inch (dpi)

Darkness
1–9

Lightens or darkens the output

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specifies the orientation of the scanned image

Specifies the paper size of the original document

Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.

• Difficult Media Letter, Difficult Media Legal, and Difficult Media Tabloid will
appear only when the scanner is set to US.

• Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media A4, and Difficult Media A3 will appear only
when the scanner is set to Metric.

Understanding printer menus

209

Menu item

Description

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on the page
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image
Notes:

•
•
•
•

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but reduces the quality of the image.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is increased.
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.

Text Default
5–90

Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90

Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provides a choice between saving scan jobs into single-page TIFF files or
multiple‑page TIFF files. For a multiple-page scan‑to‑fax job, either one TIFF file is
created containing all the pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for
each page of the scan job.

Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error

Specifies whether a transmission log is printed

Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder

Specifies a paper source when printing FTP logs

Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]

Specifies the exit bin where fax logs are printed

Note: Print log is the factory default setting.

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: [x] can be any number between 1 and 10 if the appropriate optional exit bins
are installed.

Understanding printer menus

210

Menu item

Description

FTP bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit

Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off

File Name

Lets you enter a file name

Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• There is a text limitation of 53 characters.
• A timestamp will be added to the file name.
Custom Job Scanning
Off
On

Lets you scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job

Scan Preview
Off
On

Specifies whether a scan preview appears on the display

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: This menu appears only when
a formatted, non-defective scanner
hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off

Enables shortcut creation for FTP addresses

Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of background visible on a copy job

Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue

Enables an equal balance of colors in the output

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much increase or decrease
in the dropout

Contrast
Best for content
0–5

Specifies the contrast of the output

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

211

Menu item

Description

Mirror Image
Off
On

Creates a mirror image of the original document

Negative Image
Off
On

Creates a negative image of the original document

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image

ADF Skew Fix
Off
On

Corrects slight skew on the scanned image

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge

Sharpness
1–5

Adjusts the amount of sharpness of a scanned image

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Flash Drive menu
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Menu item

Description

Format
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)

Specifies the format of the file to be sent through FTP

PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A1‑a

Sets the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP

Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Text
Graphics

Specifies the content of the original document

Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.

Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.

Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

212

Menu item

Description

Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other

Specifies how the original document was produced

Color
On
Off

Specifies whether the device captures and transmits content in color or in black and
white

Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi

Specifies the resolution of the scan job in dots per inch (dpi)

Darkness
1–9

Lightens or darkens the output

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specifies the orientation of the scanned image

Note: Black/White Laser is the factory default setting.

Note: On is the factory default setting.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.

Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

213

Menu item

Description

Specifies the paper size of the original document

Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge

Specifies how the text and graphics are oriented on a page

Notes:

• The measurement of the Universal paper size should not exceed
11.69 x 17 inches (296.9 x 431.8 mm) in the ADF and 3 x 5.5 inches SEF
(76.2 x 139.7 mm) on the scanner glass.

• The Book Original paper size is equal to: two statement-sized images, if printer
is set to US, and; two A5-sized images if printer is set to Metric.

• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.

• Difficult Media Letter, Difficult Media Legal, and Difficult Media Tabloid will
appear only when the scanner is set to US.

• Difficult Media A5, Difficult Media A4, and Difficult Media A3 will appear only
when the scanner is set to Metric.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90

Sets the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality
Notes:

•
•
•
•

“Best for content” is the factory default setting.
5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
This menu setting applies to all scan functions.

Understanding printer menus

214

Menu item

Description

Text Default
5–90

Sets the quality of the text in relation to file size and quality of the image

Text/Photo Default
5–90

Sets the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality

Photo Default
5–90

Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality

Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off

Provides a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.

Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu setting applies to all scan functions.
Scan Bit Depth
8 bit
1 bit

Enables the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off

File Name

Lets you enter a base file name

Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.

Custom Job Scanning
Off
On

Lets you scan a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single scan job

Scan Preview
Off
On

Specifies whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: This menu appears only when
a formatted, non-defective scanner
hard disk is installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of background visible on a scan job

Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue

Enables an equal balance of colors in the output

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

215

Menu item

Description

Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255

Specifies which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
in the dropout

Contrast
Best for content
0–5

Specifies the contrast of the output

Mirror Image
Off
On

Creates a mirror image of the original document

Negative Image
Off
On

Creates a negative image of the original document

Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4

Adjusts the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image

ADF Skew Fix
Off
On

Corrects slight skew in the scanned image

Scan edge to edge
Off
On

Specifies whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge

Sharpness
1–5

Adjusts the amount of sharpness on a scanned image

Temperature
‑4 to 4

Enables the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.

Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: 3 is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

216

Print Settings
Copies
1–999

Specifies a default number of copies for each print job

Paper Source
Tray [x]
MP Feeder
Envelope Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope

Sets a default paper source for all print jobs

Collate
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)

Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided

Specifies whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page

Staple
Off
On

Specifies whether prints are stapled

Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge

Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and printed

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
• Envelope Feeder appears only when a supported envelope feeder is installed.

Note: On is the factory default setting.

Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait

Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page document

Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up

Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper

Paper Saver Border
None
Solid

Prints a border on each page image when using N‑up (pages per side)

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

217

Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical

Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images when using N‑up (pages per side)

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This
setting is useful when printing on transparencies or when inserting blank pages
in a document for notes.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Envelope Feeder

Specifies the paper source for separator sheets

Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print

Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job

Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.

Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Print Settings
Setup menu
Menu item

Description

Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation

Sets the default printer language
Notes:

• PCL Emulation is the factory default setting. PostScript
emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.

• PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print
jobs.

• Setting a printer language default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.

Understanding printer menus

218

Menu item

Description

Job Waiting
Off
On

Specifies if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. These print
jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print
normally. When the missing information and/or options are
obtained, the stored jobs print.
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only if a non-read‑only printer hard disk
is installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are
not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page

Sets the logical and physical printable area
Notes:

• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.

• Fit to Page fits the page content into the selected paper size.
• Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This
setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter
and has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL or
PostScript interpreter.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk

Sets the storage location for downloads
Notes:

• RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in RAM
is temporary.

• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.

• This menu item appears only if a flash and/or disk option is
installed.
Resource Save
Off
On

Specifies how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in RAM, when the printer receives a print
job that requires more memory than is available
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.

• On sets the printer to retain downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, then 38 Memory Full appears, but downloads
are not deleted.

Understanding printer menus

219

Menu item

Description

Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First

Specifies the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All is selected
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting.

Finishing menu
Menu item

Description

Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided

Specifies whether duplex (2‑sided) printing is set as the default for all print jobs
Notes:

• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• You can set 2‑sided printing from the software program. For Windows users,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
print dialog and pop‑up menus.

Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge

Defines the way duplexed pages are bound and printed
Notes:

• Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long edge assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).

• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999

Specifies the default number of copies for each print job

Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print

Specifies whether blank pages are inserted in a print job

Collate
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)

Stacks the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies

Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• On is the factory default setting.
• On stacks the print job in sequence.

Understanding printer menus

220

Menu item

Description

Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages

Specifies whether blank separator sheets are inserted
Notes:

• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Envelope Feeder

Specifies the paper source for separator sheets
Notes:

• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP must be set to Cassette for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting.

Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up

Specifies that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper

Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical

Specifies the positioning of multiple‑page images when using Paper Saver

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.

Notes:

• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.

Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait

Specifies the orientation of a multiple‑page document

Paper Saver Border
None
Solid

Prints a border when using Paper Saver

Staple Job
Off
On

Specifies whether printed output is stapled

Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: This menu appears only if the printer is equipped with a stapler.

Understanding printer menus

221

Menu item

Description

Offset Pages
None
Between Copies
Between Jobs

Offsets pages at certain instances
Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies offsets each copy of a print job if Collate is set to On. If Collate
is set to Off, each set of printed pages are offset, such as all page 1's and all
page 2's.

• Between Jobs sets the same offset position for the entire print job regardless
of the number of copies printed.

• This menu item only appears if a stapler option is installed.

Quality menu
Menu item

Description

Print Resolution
600 dpi
1200 dpi
1200 Image Q
2400 Image Q
300 dpi

Specifies the printed output resolution

Pixel Boost
Off
Fonts
Horizontally
Vertically
Both directions
Isolated

Adjusts pixels to print a sharper image.

Toner Darkness
1–10

Lightens or darkens the print

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 8 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
Enhance Fine Lines
Off
On

Enables a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts
Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• You can set this option from the software program. For Windows users, click
File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the print
dialog and pop‑up menus.

• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, type the network
printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.

Understanding printer menus

222

Menu item

Description

Gray Correction
Auto
Off

Allows the user to print mid‑gray images

Brightness
‑6 to 6

Adjusts brightness in color print jobs

Note: Auto is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• 0 is the factory default setting.
• ‑6 is the maximum decrease. 6 is the maximum increase.
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
Contrast
0–5

Adjusts contrast in color print jobs
Notes:

• 0 is the factory default setting.
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.

Job Accounting menu
Menu item

Description

Job Accounting Log
Off
On

Determines if the scanner creates a log of the print jobs it receives

Job Accounting Utilities

Lets you print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Note: This menu appears only when Job Accounting Log is set to On.
Accounting Log Frequency
Monthly
Weekly

Determines how often a log file is created

Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log

Determines how the scanner responds when the frequency threshold expires

Disk Near Full Level
1–99
Off

Specifies the maximum size of the log file before the scanner executes Disk Near Full
Action

Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Note: 5MB is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

223

Menu item

Description

Disk Near Full Action
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current

Determines how the scanner responds when the hard disk is nearly full

Disk Full Action
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current

Determines how the scanner responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit
(100MB)

URL to Post Logs

Determines where the scanner posts job accounting logs

E‑mail Address to Send Logs

Specifies the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs

Log File Prefix

Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.

Notes:

• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.

Note: None is the factory default setting.

Utilities menu
Menu item

Description

Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All

Removes confidential and held jobs from the scanner hard disk
Notes:

• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the scanner.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.

• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
scanner hard disk or memory.

Understanding printer menus

224

Menu item

Description

Format Flash
Yes
No

Formats the flash memory
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the scanner while the flash memory
is being formatted.
Notes:

• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory option
card in the scanner.

• A flash memory option card must be installed in the scanner and operating
properly for this menu item to be available.

• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete

Removes downloads from the scanner hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs
Notes:

• Delete Now configures the scanner control panel to return to the originating
screen after the deletion process is completed.

• Do Not Delete sets the scanner control panel to return to the main Utilities
menu.
Activate Hex Trace

Assists in isolating the source of a print job problem
Notes:

• When activated, all data sent to the scanner is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.

• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn the scanner off or reset the scanner.
Coverage Estimator
Off
On

Provides an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

XPS menu
Menu item

Description

Print Error Pages
Off
On

Prints a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors
Note: Off is the factory default setting.

PDF menu
Menu item

Description

Scale to Fit
No
Yes

Scales page content to fit the selected paper size
Note: No is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

225

Menu item

Description

Annotations
Do Not Print
Print

Prints annotations in a PDF
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.

PostScript menu
Menu item

Description

Print PS Error
Off
On

Prints a page containing the PostScript error

Lock PS Startup Mode
Off
On

Enables users to disable the SysStart file

Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk

Establishes the font search order

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu is available only if a formatted flash memory option card or
printer hard disk is installed and operating properly.

• Make sure the flash memory option card or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.

• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.

PCL Emul menu
Menu item

Description

Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All

Specifies the set of fonts used by the Font Name menu item
Notes:

• Resident is the factory default setting. Resident shows the factory default
set of fonts downloaded in RAM.

• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option.
• The Flash option must be properly formatted and cannot be read/write‑,
write‑, or password‑protected.

• Download shows all the fonts downloaded in RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10

Identifies a specific font and the option where it is stored
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting. Courier 10 shows the font
name, font ID, and the storage location in the printer. The font source
abbreviation is R for Resident, F for Flash, K for Disk, and D for download.

Understanding printer menus

226

Menu item

Description

Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850

Specifies the symbol set for each font name
Notes:

• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.

• A symbol set is a set of alphabetic and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00

Changes the point size for scalable typographic fonts
Notes:

• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point Size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 1/72 of an inch.

• Point sizes can be increased or decreased in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100

PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Specifies the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts
Notes:

•
•
•
•

10 is the factory default setting.
Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi).
Pitch can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
For nonscalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.

Specifies the orientation of text and graphics on the page
Notes:

• Portrait is the factory default setting. Portrait prints text and graphics
parallel to the short edge of the page.

• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
60
64

Specifies the number of lines that print on each page

PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm

Sets the printer to print on A4‑size paper

Notes:

• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the desired
Paper Size and Orientation before setting Lines per Page.

Notes:

• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.

Understanding printer menus

227

Menu item

Description

PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
Off
On

Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command

PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
Off
On

Specifies whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command

Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Env
Off
None
0–199

Configures the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders

Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
None

Displays the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder

Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No

Returns all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings

Note: Off is the factory default setting.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• None is not an available selection. It is only displayed when it is selected
by the PCL 5 interpreter. It also ignores the Select Paper Feed command.

• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.

Understanding printer menus

228

HTML menu
Menu Item
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers

Description
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO

Sets the default font for HTML documents
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.

Menu item

Description

Font Size
1–255 pt

Sets the default font size for HTML documents
Notes:

• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%

Scales the default font for HTML documents
Notes:

• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape

Sets the page orientation for HTML documents
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Understanding printer menus

229

Menu item

Description

Margin Size
8–255 mm

Sets the page margin for HTML documents
Notes:

• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Print
Do Not Print

Specifies whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents
Note: Print is the factory default setting.

Image menu
Menu item

Description

Auto Fit
On
Off

Selects the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation

Invert
Off
On

Inverts bi‑tonal monochrome images

Scaling
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Anchor Top Left

Scales the image to fit the selected paper size

Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Rev Portrait
Rev Landscape

Sets the image orientation

Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.

Notes:

• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Notes:

• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.

Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.

Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the scanner as PDF files. They contain information
about using the scanner and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the scanner.
Other translations are available on the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Understanding printer menus

230

Menu item

Description

Print All Guides

Prints all the guides

Copy Guide

Provides information about making copies and changing settings

Fax Guide

Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings

E‑mail Guide

Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings

FTP Guide

Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings

Print Defects Guide

Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints

Information Guide

Provides help in locating additional information

Supplies Guide

Provides part numbers for ordering supplies

Maintaining the scanner

231

Maintaining the scanner
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.

Cleaning the exterior of the scanner
1 Make sure the scanner is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the scanner,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the scanner before proceeding.

2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the scanner.

4 Wipe only the exterior of the scanner, including the exit tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your scanner.

5 Make sure the paper support and exit tray are dry before using the scanner.

Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.

1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.

White underside of the scanner cover

Scanner glass

3 Wipe the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.
4 Wipe the white underside of the scanner cover until it is clean and dry.
5 Close the scanner cover.

Maintaining the scanner

232

Cleaning the ADF glass
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
Notes:

• You may also dampen a paper towel with ammonia-free, deionized glass cleaner.
• The cleaning kit for the scanner glass could also be used for this task.
2 Open the ADF cover.

3 Wipe the upper and lower ADF glass until they are clean and dry.

4 Close the ADF cover.

Cleaning the ADF parts
Clean the ADF parts periodically to ensure the ADF feeds paper properly. Residue on the ADF parts may cause scan
quality issues and false paper jam messages.

Maintaining the scanner

233

When cleaning ADF parts, use the cleaning kit that came with the scanner.

1 Remove the cleaning kit from its container under the exit tray.

2 Unpack and unfold the cleaning cloth.

3 Open the ADF cover.

4 Using the cleaning cloth, wipe the rollers in the upper portion of the ADF until all residue is removed.
1

Two rollers that do not rotate freely

Six rollers that rotate freely

Maintaining the scanner

234

a To clean the rollers that do not rotate freely, push each roller inward, rotate it, then wipe it with the cleaning
cloth.

b To clean the rollers that rotate freely, wipe the rollers until all residue is removed.

Maintaining the scanner

235

5 Using the cleaning cloth, wipe the rollers in the lower portion of the ADF until all residue is removed.

Six rollers that do not rotate freely

Six rollers that rotate freely

a To clean the rollers that do not rotate freely, manually rotate the last roller toward the ADF entrance. This will
reposition the other rollers that do not rotate freely.

Maintaining the scanner

236

b To clean the rollers that rotate freely, wipe the rollers until all residue is removed.

6 Wait for 3 minutes to let the rollers dry.

Cleaning the touch screen
Clean the scanner touch screen regularly to remove fingerprints and smudges.

1 Make sure the scanner is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the scanner,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the scanner before proceeding.

2 Remove the cleaning kit from the compartment under the exit tray.

3 Unpack the cleaning kit.
4 Wipe the touch screen with the wet cloth first, and then with the dry cloth.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use liquids, household cleaners, or detergents, as they may damage the
touch screen.

Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:

• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)

Maintaining the scanner

•
•
•
•

237

High humidity above 80%
Salty air
Corrosive gases
Heavy dust

Checking the status of supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required.

Checking the status of supplies from the scanner control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.

Checking the status of supplies from a network computer
Note: The computer must be connected to the same network as the scanner.

1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status.
The Device Status page appears, displaying a summary of supply levels.

Ordering supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact
the place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.

Ordering scanner supplies
Ordering a cleaning kit
Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain the optimal performance of the device.
Part name

Part number

ADF feed roller cleaning cloth

16J0900

Ordering a separator pad
When Replace separator pad appears on the display, order a separator pad.

Maintaining the scanner

238

Part name

Part number

Separator pad

40X6447

Ordering printer supplies
Ordering print cartridges
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when the print becomes faded:

1 Remove the print cartridge.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute toner.

3 Reinsert the cartridge and continue printing.
Note: Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded, and then replace the cartridge.

Recommended print cartridges
Part name

Lexmark Return Program Cartridge

Regular cartridge

Print cartridge

T650A11A

T650A21A

High-yield print cartridge

T650H11A

T650H21A

Extra-high-yield print cartridge*

T654X11A

T654X21A

High-yield print cartridge for Label
applications

T650H04A

Not applicable

Extra-high-yield print cartridge for Label T654X04A
applications*

Not applicable

For the US and Canada

For Europe, the Middle East, and Africa
Print cartridge

T650A11E

T650A21E

High-yield print cartridge

T650H11E

T650H21E

Extra-high-yield print cartridge*

T654X11E

T654X21E

High-yield print cartridge for Label
applications

T650H04E

Not applicable

Extra-high-yield print cartridge for Label T654X04E
applications*

Not applicable

* Available for the T654 models.

Maintaining the scanner

Part name

239

Lexmark Return Program Cartridge

Regular cartridge

Print cartridge

T650A11P

T650A21P

High-yield print cartridge

T650H11P

T650H21P

Extra-high-yield print cartridge*

T654X11P

T654X21P

High-yield print cartridge for Label
applications

T650H04P

Not applicable

Extra-high-yield print cartridge for Label T654X04P
applications*

Not applicable

For the Asia Pacific Region

For Latin America
Print cartridge

T650A11L

T650A21L

High-yield print cartridge

T650H11L

T650H21L

Extra-high-yield print cartridge*

T654X11L

T654X21L

High-yield print cartridge for Label
applications

T650H04L

Not applicable

Extra-high-yield print cartridge for Label T654X04L
applications*

Not applicable

* Available for the T654 models.

Ordering a maintenance kit
When 80 Routine maintenance appears, order a maintenance kit. The maintenance kit contains all the items
necessary to replace the pick rollers, the charge roll, the transfer roller, and the fuser.
Notes:

• Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
• The charge roll, fuser, pick rollers, and transfer roller can also be individually ordered and replaced as necessary.
• To check the fuser type (T1 or T2) installed in the printer, remove the print cartridge, and then view the label on
the fuser.
Part name

Type

Part number

Maintenance kit (T1 fuser)

100 V

40X4723

110 V

40X4724

220 V

40X4765

100 V

40X4766

110 V

40X4767

220 V

40X4768

Maintenance kit (T2 fuser)

Ordering charge rolls
When toner fog or background shading appears on printed pages, order replacement charge rolls.

Maintaining the scanner

240

Part name

Part number

Charge roll assembly

40X5852

Ordering a fuser
To check the fuser type (T1 or T2) installed in the printer, remove the print cartridge, and then view the label on the
fuser.
Part name

Part number

T1 fuser

40X1870 (100 V)
40X4418 (110 V)
40X1871 (220 V)

T2 fuser

40X5853 (100 V)
40X5854 (110 V)
40X5855 (220 V)

Ordering a fuser wiper
When Replace wiper appears on the display, order a fuser wiper.
Part name

Part number

Fuser wiper

40X4417

Ordering pick rollers
When the paper fails to properly feed from the tray, order new pick rollers.
Part name

Part number

Pick rollers

40X4308

Ordering staple cartridges
Part name

Part number

Staple cartridges–3 pack

25A0013

For more information, see the illustrations inside the stapler door.

Ordering a transfer roll assembly
When toner smudges appear on the front or back of printed pages, order a replacement transfer roller.
Part name

Part number

Transfer roll assembly

40X1886

Maintaining the scanner

241

Replacing supplies
Replacing the separator pad
1 Turn the printer off, and then open the ADF cover.

2 Remove the separator pad.

3 Unpack the new separator pad, and then install it in the scanner.

Maintaining the scanner

242

4 Close the ADF cover.

5 Dispose of the old separator pad.

Securing the memory before moving the scanner
Statement of Volatility
Your scanner contains various types of memory that are capable of storing device and network settings, information
from embedded solutions, and user data. The following are the types of memory and the types of data they store:

• Volatile memory—Your device utilizes standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to temporarily buffer user data
during simple print and copy jobs.

• Non‑volatile memory—Your device may utilize two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash
memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, device settings, network information, scanner and
bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.

• Hard disk memory—Some devices have a hard disk drive installed. The scanner hard disk is designed for
device‑specific functionality and cannot be used for long term storage for data that is not print‑related. The hard
disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or network file
shares, or FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered user data from complex
scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
There are several circumstances where you may want to erase the contents of memory of devices installed in the
scanner. A partial list includes:

• The scanner is being decommissioned.
• The scanner hard drive is being replaced.

Maintaining the scanner

243

• The scanner is being moved to a different department or location.
• The scanner is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The scanner is being removed from your premises for service.
Disposing of a printer or scanner hard drive
Note: Not all printers or scanners have a hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to ensure that confidential data stored on
the scanner hard disk cannot be accessed once the scanner—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.

• Degaussing—Flushes the hard drive with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: The only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to physically destroy each memory device on
which data could have been stored.

Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your scanner requires a power source to retain information. To erase the
buffered data, simply power down the device.

Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.

• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the scanner.
2 Hold down

2 ABC

and

6 MNO

while turning the scanner on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress

bar appears.
The scanner performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the scanner is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.

3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The scanner will reboot several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords in the scanner.

4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The scanner will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Maintaining the scanner

244

Erasing scanner hard disk memory
Configuring Disk Wiping lets you remove residual confidential material left by scan, print, copy, and fax jobs, by securely
overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.

1 Turn off the scanner.
2 Hold down

2 ABC

and

6 MNO

while turning the scanner on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress

3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.

4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping. A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
Note: Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the scanner will be
unavailable for other user tasks.

5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The scanner will power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.

Moving the scanner
Before moving the scanner
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the scanner, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
scanner damage:

• Turn off the scanner using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the scanner before moving it.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the scanner caused by improper moving is not covered by the scanner
warranty.

Moving the scanner to another location
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the scanner caused by improper moving is not covered by the scanner
warranty.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or scanner damage:

Maintaining the scanner

The scanner can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:

• Keep the scanner in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
• Make sure the scan bar is in the home position.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Lock Scanner Head

2 Turn off the scanner and printer.
3 Lock the scan bar.

Shipping the scanner
When shipping the scanner, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.

245

Administrative support

246

Administrative support
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

Checking the status of the scanner
1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Device Status.
The device status shows the following:

•
•
•
•

Paper tray settings
Level of toner in the toner or print cartridge
Percentage of life remaining in the maintenance kit
Capacity measurement of certain scanner parts

Checking the virtual display
1 Access the Embedded Web Server associated with your scanner.
Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a scanner control panel.

Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the scanner to send your e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be
changed or added, or when there is a paper jam.

1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.

Administrative support

247

If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > E‑mail Alert Setup.
3 Select the items for notification, and type the e‑mail addresses.
4 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.

Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:

1 Type the scanner IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.

Restoring factory default settings
If you want to retain a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings.
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now > Submit

Clearing jams

248

Clearing jams
By carefully selecting paper and loading it properly, you can avoid most jams. If jams do occur, follow the steps outlined
in this section.
To clear a jam message and resume printing, clear the entire paper path, and then touch Continue, jam cleared on the
home screen. If Jam Recovery is set to On, then the printer prints a new copy of the page that jammed. If Jam Recovery
is set to Auto, then the printer reprints the jammed page if enough printer memory is available.

Avoiding jams
Paper tray recommendations
•
•
•
•
•

Make sure the paper lies flat in the tray.
Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it prior to printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the indicated maximum height.
Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly
against the paper or envelopes.

• Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.

Paper recommendations
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex and straighten paper before loading it.

•
•
•
•

Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
Make sure all paper sizes and types are set correctly in the scanner control panel menus.
Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.

Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the display. Open doors and covers and remove
trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed paper from the paper path.

Clearing jams

249

2
9
10
3

1
8
7

11
12

Area

Jam numbers What to do

200–201

Open the front door to remove the print cartridge, and then remove the jammed paper.

202–203

Remove the jammed paper from the top rear door or standard exit bin.

230

231–239

24x

Pull out the specified tray, and then remove the jammed paper.

250

Remove the jammed paper from the multipurpose feeder.

260

Lift the envelope weight; and then remove the jammed envelope.

281

Remove jammed paper from the stapler exit bin.

283

Open staple door, remove the staple cartridge, and then remove the jammed staple.

291

Close the scanner glass cover.

290

Close the ADF cover.

2yy.xx

Remove the jammed paper from the bottom rear door or the front portion of Tray 1.
Open the duplex door, and then remove the jammed paper.

Open the ADF cover, and then remove the jammed paper.

200–201 paper jams
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

1 Push the release latch, and then lower the multipurpose feeder door.
2 Push the release latch, and then open the front cover.
4
2
1

Clearing jams

3 Lift and pull the print cartridge out of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum on the underside of the cartridge. Use
the cartridge handle whenever you are holding the cartridge.

4 Place the print cartridge aside on a flat, smooth surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not leave the cartridge exposed to light for extended periods.

5 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Notes:

• The jammed paper may be covered with unfused toner which can stain garments and skin.
• Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
• If the paper is not easy to remove, then open the rear door and remove the paper from there.
6 Align and reinstall the print cartridge.
7 Close the front cover.
8 Close the multipurpose feeder door.
9 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

202–203 paper jams
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.

250

Clearing jams

Paper jam inside the printer
1 Pull down the top rear door.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Close the top rear door.
4 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Paper jam in the standard exit bin
Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

251

Clearing jams

230 paper jam
Paper jam in the duplex unit
1 Remove the standard tray from the printer.

2 Pull down the bottom rear door.

252

Clearing jams

253

3 Push down the tab.

4 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

5 Close the bottom rear door.
6 Insert the standard tray.
7 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Paper jam in the standard tray
1 Remove the standard tray from the printer.
2 Push down the tab.

2
3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

Clearing jams

254

4 Insert the standard tray.
5 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

231–239 paper jams
Paper jam in the duplex unit
1 Push in and hold the latch while pulling up the rear door of the optional duplex unit.

2
1

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Close the rear duplex door.
4 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Clearing jams

Paper jam in the standard tray
1 Remove the standard tray from the printer.
2 Remove the duplex jam access tray.

3 Raise the recessed duplex bar.

4 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

5 Insert the duplex jam access tray.
6 Insert the standard tray.
7 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

255

Clearing jams

24x paper jam
1 Pull out the tray indicated on the display.

2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

3 Reinsert the tray.
4 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
5 If the jam message persists for a 250‑ or 550‑sheet tray, then remove the tray from the printer.
6 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

7 Reinsert the tray.
8 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

256

Clearing jams

257

250 paper jam
1 From the multipurpose feeder, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

2 Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.

3 Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.
4 Slide the paper guide until it lightly rests against the edge of the paper.

5 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

Clearing jams

258

260 paper jam
The envelope at the bottom of the stack enters the printer first.

1 Lift the envelope weight, and then remove all the envelopes.

2 If the jammed envelope has entered the printer and cannot be pulled out, then lift the envelope feeder up and out
of the printer. Set it aside.

3 Remove the jammed envelope from the printer.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
If you cannot remove the envelope, then the print cartridge will have to be removed.

a Lift and pull the print cartridge out of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the photoconductor drum on the underside of the cartridge.
Use the cartridge handle whenever you are holding the cartridge.

b Place the print cartridge aside on a flat, smooth surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not leave the cartridge exposed to light for extended periods.

c Remove the jammed envelope.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

d Align and reinstall the print cartridge.

Clearing jams

4 Reinstall the envelope feeder. Make sure it snaps into place.
5 Flex and stack the envelopes.
6 Reload the envelopes in the envelope feeder.
7 Adjust the paper guide.
8 Lower the envelope weight.
9 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

281 paper jam
1 From the stapler exit bin, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.

Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

2 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

259

Clearing jams

283 paper jam
1 Press the latch to open the stapler door.

2 Pull the latch of the staple cartridge holder down, and then pull the holder out of the printer.

3 Use the metal tab to lift the staple guard, and then remove any loose staples.

260

Clearing jams

4 Press down on the staple guard until it snaps into place.

5 Push the cartridge holder firmly back into the stapler unit until the cartridge holder clicks into place.
6 Close the stapler door.
7 From the scanner control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.

2yy.xx paper jams
The scanner failed to feed one or more pages through the ADF.

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF.
Note: The message clears when the pages are removed from the ADF.

2 Open the ADF cover.

3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close the ADF cover.
5 Reload original documents into the ADF, straighten the stack, and then adjust the paper guide.

261

Troubleshooting

262

Troubleshooting
The indicator light is blinking
The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e‑mail. To disable the blinking light, follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions for a scanner on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Menus > Settings > General Settings

2 Touch the arrows next to Run initial setup, and then touch Yes > Submit.
3 Turn the scanner off, and then turn the scanner back on.
4 From the scanner control panel, touch your language.
5 Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.
6 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
7 Touch Fax and E‑mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.
Note: You can use these same steps to enable fax and e‑mail.

Understanding printer messages
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the scanner
control panel Paper menu, and then touch Paper changed, continue.

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting

263

Change [paper source] to [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Check duplex connection
Try one or more of the following:

• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:

1
2
3
4
5
6

Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the duplex unit.
Reattach the duplex unit.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Turn the printer back on.

If the error occurs again, then:

1
2
3
4

Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the duplex unit.
Contact customer support.

• From the scanner control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the duplex unit.

Check tray [x] connection
Try one or more of the following:

• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:

1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 If an optional duplex unit is installed, then remove it.

Troubleshooting

4
5
6
7

264

Remove the indicated tray.
Reattach the tray.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Turn the printer back on.

If the error occurs again, then:

1
2
3
4

Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the tray.
Contact customer support.

• From the scanner control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the tray.

Close door or insert cartridge
The cartridge is missing or not installed correctly. Insert the cartridge and close all doors and covers.

Close finisher side door
Close the side door of the finisher.

Disk corrupted
The scanner attempted a hard disk recovery on a corrupted scanner hard disk, and the hard disk cannot be repaired.
The hard disk must be reformatted.
Touch Format disk to reformat the hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the hard disk.

Disk full, scan job canceled
The scan job cannot continue because there is insufficient disk space.
Touch Continue to clear the message.

Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the scanner hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.

Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device has been inserted. Remove the USB device, and then install a supported one.

Troubleshooting

265

Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.

If restarting job, replace originals that have not begun to exit the scanner
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to continue scanning from the scanner immediately after the last successful scan job.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the last successful scan job.
• Touch Restart job to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.

Insert staple cartridge
Try one or more of the following:

• Insert a staple cartridge.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the staple finisher.

Insert Tray [x]
Insert the specified tray into the printer.

Install bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:

• Install the specified exit bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified exit bin.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.

Install duplex
Try one or more of the following:

• Install the duplex unit:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the duplex unit.

Troubleshooting

266

4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Restart the printer.
• Cancel the current job.

Install envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:

• Install the envelope feeder.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the envelope feeder.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.

Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:

• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.

Install MICR Cartridge
The printer does not have a MICR cartridge installed. Install a MICR cartridge to continue printing.

Load [src] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:

• Load the specified paper in the tray or feeder.
• Touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot find
a tray with the correct paper type and size, it prints from the default paper source.

• Cancel the print job.

Troubleshooting

267

Load [src] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:

• Cancel the print job.

Load [src] with [size]
Try one or more of the following:

• Cancel the print job.

Load [src] with [type] [size]
Try one or more of the following:

• Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Load the specified paper in the manual feeder.
Touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear the message and continue printing.
Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
Cancel the print job.

Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Troubleshooting

268

Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Load staples
Try one or more of the following:

• Replace the specified staple cartridge in the finisher.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Note: The print job will be stapled if the staple cartridge is replaced or inserted.

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.

Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Printer and scanner not connected, check connection and restart both devices
Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the printer and the scanner.
• Restart the printer and scanner.

Reattach bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:

• Turn the printer off and then back on.
• Reattach the specified bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Troubleshooting

3
4
5
6

Remove the specified bin.
Reattach the bin.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Turn the printer back on.

• Remove the specified bin:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bin.
4 Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bin.

Reattach bin [x] – [y]
Try one or more of the following:

• Turn the printer off and then back on.
• Reattach the specified bins:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bins.
4 Reattach the bins.
5 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6 Turn the printer back on.
• Remove the specified bins:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the specified bins.
4 Contact Customer Support.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the specified bins.

Reattach envelope feeder
Try one or more of the following:

• Turn the printer off and then back on.
If the error occurs a second time, then:

1
2
3
4
5
6

Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the envelope feeder.
Reattach the envelope feeder.
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Turn the printer back on.

269

Troubleshooting

270

If the error occurs again, then:

1
2
3
4

Turn the printer off.
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Remove the envelope feeder.
Contact customer support.

• From the scanner control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print without using the envelope feeder.

Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.

Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.

Remove paper from bin [x]
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.

Remove paper from all bins
Output bins have reached their capacity. Remove paper from all output bins to clear the message and continue printing.

Remove paper from [linked bin set name]
Remove the paper from the specified bin. The printer automatically senses paper removal and resumes printing.
If removing the paper does not clear the message, then touch Continue.

Replace all originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

Troubleshooting

271

Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

Replace last scanned page and jammed originals if restarting job.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the last successful scan
job.

Replace pick roller
The scanner needs to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Replace wiper
Try one or more of the following:

• Replace the fuser wiper in the printer.
• From the scanner control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

Replace separator pad
Try one or more of the following:

• Replace the separator pad in the scanner.
• From the scanner control panel, touch Supply replaced to clear the message and reset the separator pad count to
0.
Note: The device assumes that the separator pad has been replaced.

• Touch Ignore to clear the message.
Note: The message reappears when the device is turned back on.

Troubleshooting

272

Restore Held Jobs?
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the scanner hard disk.
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.

Scan document too long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the scan job.

Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.

Scanner locked, release lock under scanner
1 Unlock the scan bar.

2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.

Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.

Unsupported disk
An unsupported disk has been inserted. Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.

Tray [x] paper size unsupported
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.

Troubleshooting

273

30.xx Invalid refill, change cartridge
Remove the print cartridge, and then install a supported one.
Note: The message disappears when a new cartridge is installed.

31.xx Replace defective cartridge
Remove the defective print cartridge, and then install a new one.

32.xx Cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the print cartridge, and then install a supported one.
Note: It may take the printer 10–20 seconds to determine whether or not the print cartridge is supported. The
printer may be allowed to print pages during this interval. If pages are allowed to print, then they will not be
reprinted once a valid print cartridge is inserted.

34 Incorrect paper size, open [paper source]
Try one or more of the following:

•
•
•
•

Load the appropriate paper in the tray.
From the scanner control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and print the job using a different paper tray.
Check tray length and width guides and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
For Windows users, check the Print Properties settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper
size and type.
For Macintosh users, check the Print dialog settings to make sure the print job is requesting the correct paper size
and type.

• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, then make sure the
paper is large enough for the data being printed.

• Cancel the current print job.

35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Ready appears, enable Resource Save.

• Install additional memory.

37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.

Troubleshooting

274

37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.

37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.

38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the print job.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in the memory.
• Install additional scanner memory.

39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.

42.xy Cartridge region mismatch
Install a toner or print cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer
region. y indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
0

Worldwide

Europe, the Middle East, and Africa

Asia

Latin America

Invalid region

51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.

Troubleshooting

275

52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.

• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.

54 Network [x] software error
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.

54 Serial option [x] error
Try one or more of the following:

• Make sure the serial cable is connected properly and is the correct one for the serial port.
• Make sure the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the scanner
and host computer.

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn the scanner power off and then back on to reset the scanner.

54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.

55 Unsupported option in slot [x]
1 Turn the scanner off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the scanner system board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the scanner back on.

Troubleshooting

276

56 Parallel port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.

• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.

56 Serial port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.

• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.

56 USB port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.

• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.

57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored
Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:

•
•
•
•

The printer firmware has been updated.
Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.
The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.
The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.

Touch Continue to clear the message.

58 Too many bins attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional bins.

Troubleshooting

277

4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many disks installed
1 Turn the scanner off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess hard disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the scanner back on.

58 Too many flash options installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.

59 Incompatible Duplex
Only options designed specifically for this printer are supported.
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the duplex unit.
• From the scanner control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the duplex
unit.

59 Incompatible envelope feeder
Only options designed specifically for this printer are supported.

Troubleshooting

278

Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the envelope feeder.
• From the scanner control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
envelope feeder.

59 Incompatible output bin [x]
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the specified output bin.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified output bin.

59 Incompatible tray [x]
Only options designed specifically for the printer are supported.
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the specified tray.
• From the scanner control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the
specified tray.

61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Install a different scanner hard disk before performing any operations that require a hard disk.

62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
Note: Any information not previously stored on the scanner hard disk is deleted.

• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with larger capacity.

80 Routine maintenance
The printer needs to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

88.xx Cartridge nearly low
Order a replacement for the specified print cartridge.

Troubleshooting

279

88 Cartridge low
1 Remove the specified cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.

2 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Notes:

• Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded. When the print remains faded, replace the
cartridge.

• Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily.

88.xx Replace cartridge
1 Replace the specified toner or print cartridge.
From the scanner control panel, touch More Information for instructions on replacing the cartridge.

2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.

2yy.xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.

• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, and e-mailing.

280.06 Paper missing
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.

• Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.

Troubleshooting

280

• Touch Restart job to clear the message and start a new scan job with the same settings as the previous job.

295.20 Multifeed Sensor On
Try one or more of the following:

• Remove the jammed paper from the ADF.
For more information, see “2yy.xx paper jams” on page 261.

• Resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully scanned page.
If the message still appears, then try one or more of the following:

• Touch Disable paper thickness sensor to disable the sensor for the remainder of the scan job.
• Turn off the multifeed sensor.
For more information, see “Setting the ADF to detect multiple paper feeds” on page 80.

840.01 Scanner disabled by admin
Print without the scanner or contact your system support person.

840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
Try one or more of the following:

• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to bring the scanner back online.

1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds and then disables the download emulator on the firmware
card.
To fix this, download the correct download emulator version from the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com.

Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:

•
•
•
•
•

The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.

Troubleshooting

281

• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.

• All options are properly installed.
• The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.

Solving printing problems
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.

1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.

Scanner control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The scanner self‑test failed. Turn the scanner off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the scanner on.
If Ready does not appear, then turn the scanner off and contact customer support.

Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the flash drive is supported.

Jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Ready or Power Saver appears on the display before sending a job to print.

CHECK TO SEE IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.

CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.

MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
• If you are using a USB port, make sure you are running a supported operating system and using compatible printer
software.

Troubleshooting

282

MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS INSTALLED PROPERLY AND WORKING
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected, check the
network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support person to make
sure the network is functioning correctly.
Copies of the printer software are also available on the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
For more information, visit the Lexmark Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.

MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.

Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.

• Delete the print job, and then print it again.
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting
all jobs except the first one.

• For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents"
check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.

• For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the
printer.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.

Print job takes longer than expected
Try one or more of the following:

REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print
job.

Troubleshooting

283

TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off >

CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS
When using Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.

Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the scanner control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

Incorrect characters print
• Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hex appears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.

• Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.

Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.

USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You
must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.

Troubleshooting

284

Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.

REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the job.

MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.

Unexpected page breaks
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Print Timeout

2 Increase the Print Timeout value, and then touch

Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:

1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.

Troubleshooting

3 Lower the scanner unit.

Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Blank pages
Checkerboard pattern
Distorted graphics or pictures
Missing characters
Faded print
Dark print
Skewed lines
Smudges
Streaks
Unexpected characters
White lines in print

Try one or more of the following:

CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES
Check the display and clear any error messages.

REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.

CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 231.

CLEAN THE ADF GLASS
Clean the ADF glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see “Cleaning the ADF glass” on page 232.

ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY
Adjust the toner darkness in the Copy menu.

MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY
Check the quality of the original document.

285

Troubleshooting

286

PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the lower left corner of the scanner glass.

MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS
When patterns (moiré) appear on the copy:

• On the Copy screen make sure the content type and source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting

• On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is selected.
When the text is light or disappearing:

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Content > Text >

> select the appropriate source for the original document >

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
When the copy appears washed out or overexposed:

• On the Copy screen make sure the content type and source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.

• From the Copy screen, adjust the darkness setting.
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting

• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting

Partial document or photo copies
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass.

Troubleshooting

287

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the scanner control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
Make sure:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The scanner is turned on.
The green Ethernet cable is connected to the scanner, and then to the printer.
The other Ethernet cable is securely attached to the scanner, print server, option, or other network device.
The power cord is plugged into the scanner and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
The scanner is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.

Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the scanner off and then back on. This often fixes the problem
with the scanner.

Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.

Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.

Troubleshooting

THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.

Poor scanned image quality
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE SCANNER DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.

CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 231.

CLEAN THE ADF GLASS
Clean the ADF glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see “Cleaning the ADF glass” on page 232.

ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.

CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the lower left corner of the scanner glass.
Make sure to adjust the paper guides when loading original documents into the ADF.

Partial document or photo scans
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass.

288

Troubleshooting

289

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.

Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.

Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.

CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Ready appears.

Troubleshooting

290

CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:

• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine

CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.

REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services
can be used.

• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN
provider.

• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,
contact your DSL provider.

• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.

CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending
a fax.

• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.

TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.

CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Ready appears.

TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.

Troubleshooting

291

VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.

THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.

Can send but not receive faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK TO SEE IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.

CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone line rings before the printer answers. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep
the Ring Delay setting at 4.

1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.

2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 In the Rings to Answer box, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before answering.
6 Click Submit.

THE TONER MAY BE LOW
88 Cartridge low appears when the toner is low.

Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.

Troubleshooting

292

THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.

MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.

Received fax has poor print quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

RE‑SEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:

• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.

THE TONER MAY BE LOW
When 88 Cartridge low appears or when you experience faded print, replace the cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:

2 Click Settings.
3 Click Fax Settings.
4 Click Analog Fax Setup.
5 In the Max Speed box, click on one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600

6 Click Submit.

Troubleshooting

293

Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1 Type the scanner IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the scanner, then you can:

• View the information on the scanner control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.

• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > System tab > Log.
4 From the Filter menu, select an application status.
5 From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.

MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE
Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.
To help prevent errors, make sure either “Append time stamp” or “Overwrite existing file” is selected in the
destination configuration settings.

ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS
In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, lower the scan resolution, disable
Color, or change the Content type to Text.

CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.

Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
Try one or more of the following:

RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

Troubleshooting

294

CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off using the power switch.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or
go to www.lexmark.com to view the option instruction sheet.

MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.
For more information, see “Updating available options in the printer driver” on page 47.

Paper tray problems
Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.

RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.

MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not
be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that
came with the paper tray, or go to http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.

2,000-sheet drawer problems
CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION
Make sure the 2,000‑sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer.

Troubleshooting

295

LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder

CLEAR ANY JAMS
Open the side door of the tray or feeder, and then remove any jammed paper.

AVOID PAPER JAMS
•
•
•
•
•
•

Flex the paper.
Make sure the drawer is properly installed.
Make sure paper is loaded correctly.
Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray.
Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged.
Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded.

Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS
Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the scanner system board.

CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the ISP port.

MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.

Internal print server does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS
• Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the scanner system board.
• Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.

MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For more information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.

Troubleshooting

USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION
Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the scanner system board.

CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.

Solving paper feed problems
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
CHECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.

Solving paper feed problems (scanner)
Original documents misfeed in the ADF
ADJUST THE PAPER GUIDES
Adjust the paper guides until they lightly rest against the edge of the paper.

REMOVE EXCESS PAPER FROM THE ADF
Make sure that the paper does not exceed the maximum fill line on the paper guides.
For more information, see “Understanding the ADF and scanner glass” on page 12.

CHECK THE PAPER PATH
Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.

SET THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE FOR DIFFICULT MEDIA
For more information, see “Setting the paper size and type for difficult media” on page 78.

DISABLE THE PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR
Turn off the multifeed sensor.
For more information, see “Setting the ADF to detect multiple paper feeds” on page 80.

296

Troubleshooting

297

Paper sticks to the scanner glass
CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
Use a slightly damp, lint-free cloth or paper towel to wipe the scanner glass and the white underside of the scanner
cover.

Multiple pages feed into the ADF
ADJUST THE PAPER GUIDES
Adjust the paper guides until they lightly rest against the edge of the paper.

CHECK THE SEPARATOR ROLL
The separator roll may be worn. Install a new separator roll using the instructions that came with the part.

SET THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE FOR DIFFICULT MEDIA
For more information, see “Setting the paper size and type for difficult media” on page 78.

DISABLE THE PAPER THICKNESS SENSOR
Turn off the multifeed sensor.
For more information, see “Setting the ADF to detect multiple paper feeds” on page 80.

Solving paper feed problems (printer)
Paper frequently jams
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the stack of paper you load does not exceed the maximum stack height indicated in the tray or on the
multipurpose feeder.

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

Troubleshooting

298

THE PAPER MAY HAVE ABSORBED MOISTURE DUE TO HIGH HUMIDITY
• Load paper from a fresh package.
• Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Jammed pages are not reprinted
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery

2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recovery until On or Auto appears.
3 Touch

Solving print quality problems
The information in the following topics may help you solve print quality problems. If these suggestions do not correct
the problem, contact customer support. You may have a printer part that requires adjustment or replacement.

Printer is printing blank pages

Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is distributed evenly among all four
cartridges:

1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.

2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.

Troubleshooting

299

3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Characters have jagged or uneven edges

If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the
software program.

Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the tray width and length guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the scanner control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.

Troubleshooting

300

Shadow images appear on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

1 From the scanner control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88 cartridge low appears, make sure that toner is evenly distributed in the cartridge.

1 Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.

2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the print cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the print cartridge.

Troubleshooting

Gray background on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE BACKGROUND DARKNESS OR REMOVAL SETTING
Try one or more of the following:

• Adjust the darkness to a lighter setting.
• Increase the background removal setting.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN OR DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.

Incorrect margins

ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in the tray.

CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:

301

Troubleshooting

302

Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray:

1 From the scanner control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper weight settings.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

Print irregularities

Try one or more of the following:

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

1 From the scanner control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.

AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.

Troubleshooting

303

MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.

MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

Print is too dark

Try one or more of the following:

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

• From the scanner control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective print cartridge.

Troubleshooting

304

Print is too light

Try one or more of the following:

LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.

AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88 Cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print cartridge.

1 Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective print cartridge.

Troubleshooting

305

Repeating defects

)

)
)

)

REPEATING MARKS OCCUR EVENLY DOWN THE PAGE
Replace the charge rolls if the defects occur every 28.3 mm (1.11 in.).
Replace the transfer roller if the defects occur every 51.7 mm (2.04 in.).
Replace the print cartridge if the defects occur every:

• 47.8 mm (1.88 in.)
• 96.8 mm (3.81 in.)
Replace the fuser if the defects occur every:

• 88.0 mm (3.46 in.)
• 95.2 mm (3.75 in.)

Skewed print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.

• Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack.
• Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack.

CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.

Troubleshooting

306

Solid color or black pages appear on prints

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY, ARE NOT DEFECTIVE AND NOT LOW ON TONER
• Remove the print cartridges.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.

• Reinsert the print cartridges.
Note: If the quality does not improve, replace the print cartridges.

• If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.

Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper

Try one or more of the following:

ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, choose a different fill pattern from your software program.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE
• Use only the recommended transparencies.
• Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder.
• Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or
feeder.

Troubleshooting

307

MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge low appears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print
cartridge:

1 Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.

2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.

Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:

SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
• From the scanner control panel Paper Menu, select Default Source.
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty print cartridge.

Troubleshooting

308

Streaked vertical lines appear on prints

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:

SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
• From the scanner control panel, select the Default Source from the Paper Menu.
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty print cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective transfer module.

Toner fog or background shading appears on a page
Try one or more of the following:

MAKE SURE PRINT CARTRIDGES ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY AND ARE NOT DEFECTIVE
Reinstall or replace the print cartridge.

MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER BELT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the transfer belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.

MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact customer support.

CHECK THE SOFTWARE PROGRAM OR APPLICATION
The software program or application may have specified an off‑white background.

Troubleshooting

309

Toner rubs off

Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray.

CHECK THE PAPER WEIGHT AND PAPER TEXTURE SETTINGS
Change the Paper Weight from Normal to Heavy. If necessary, then change the Paper Texture from Normal to Rough
in the scanner control panel Paper menu.

THE FUSER IS WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the fuser.

Toner specks

These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:

THE PRINT CARTRIDGE MAY BE DEFECTIVE
Replace the print cartridge.

THERE IS TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Clean any toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact Customer Support.

Troubleshooting

310

Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.

CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting is set to Transparency:

Uneven print density

ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE OR WORN PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective print cartridge.

Embedded Web Server does not open
Try one or more of the following:

CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION
Make sure the printer, scanner, and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.

CHECK ADDRESS ENTERED INTO THE WEB BROWSER
• Depending on the network settings, you may need to type “https://” instead of “http://” before the
scanner IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support
person.

• Make sure you have the correct scanner IP address.

Troubleshooting

311

TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For
more information, contact your system support person.

Contacting customer support
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com.

Notices

312

Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark 6500e
Machine type:
4036
Model(s):
310

Edition notice
November 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2012 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.

Notices

313

Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in
the United States and/or other countries.
PrintCryption, ScanBack, and StapleSmart are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus

The Monotype Corporation plc

Antique Olive

Monsieur Marcel OLIVE

Apple-Chancery

Apple Computer, Inc.

Arial

The Monotype Corporation plc

CG Times

Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation

Chicago

Apple Computer, Inc.

Clarendon

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Eurostile

Nebiolo

Geneva

Apple Computer, Inc.

GillSans

The Monotype Corporation plc

Helvetica

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Hoefler

Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry

ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman

International Typeface Corporation

ITC Mona Lisa

International Typeface Corporation

ITC Zapf Chancery

International Typeface Corporation

Joanna

The Monotype Corporation plc

Marigold

Arthur Baker

Monaco

Apple Computer, Inc.

New York

Apple Computer, Inc.

Oxford

Arthur Baker

Palatino

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Stempel Garamond

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

Taffy

Agfa Corporation

Times New Roman

The Monotype Corporation plc

Notices

Univers

314

Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.

Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-003; FCC ID: IYLM01003; Industry Canada IC: 2376A-M01003
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M05-001; FCC ID: IYLLEXM05001; Industry Canada IC: 2376A-M05001
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M05-002; FCC ID: IYLLEXM05002; Industry Canada IC: 2376A-M05002

Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.

Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing

56 dB(A)

Scanning

52 dB (A)

Copying

57 dB (A)

Notices

315

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Ready

30dB (A)

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive

The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.

Static sensitivity notice

This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.

Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature

15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90 °F) and 8% to 80% RH

Shipping and storage temperature

1 to 60 °C (34 to 140 °F)

Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.

Notices

316

Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。

Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode

Description

Power consumption (Watts)

Printing

The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.

600 W duplex; 780 W simplex

Copy

The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.

Scan

The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.

Ready

The product is waiting for a print job.

100 W

Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode.

17 W

Off

The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off. 1 W

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Notices

317

Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.

Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.

Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.

Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.

European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC
on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.

Radio interference notice
Warning

Notices

318

This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.

Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in

Notices

319

the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.

Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.

Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.

Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted

Notices

320

equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:

• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and

• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.

• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.

Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives
metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines
in Switzerland.

Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877)
devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute
installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.

Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte
vorhanden sind.

Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che
ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le
linee analogiche in Svizzera.

Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to

Notices

321

electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.

Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.

Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :

Notices

322

(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.

Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.

Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium

Notices

323

Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT

Česky

Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.

Dansk

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Deutsch

Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.

Ελληνική

ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.

English

Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Español

Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.

Eesti

Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.

Suomi

Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.

Français

Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.

Magyar

Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.

Íslenska

Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.

Italiano

Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.

Latviski

Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.

Lietuvių

Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.

Malti

Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.

Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.

Notices

324

Norsk

Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.

Polski

Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.

Português

A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.

Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska

Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.

STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the countryspecific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”

Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.

Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.

Notices

325

To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.

Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.

Notices

326

Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.

Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.

Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.

Notices

327

The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.

Index

328

Index
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 280
2000‑sheet tray
loading 70
200–201 paper jams 249
202–203 paper jams 250
230 paper jam 252
231–239 paper jams 254
24x paper jam 256
250 paper jam 257
250‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
loading 67
260 paper jam 258
280.06 Paper missing 279
281 paper jam 259
283 paper jam 260
295.20 Multifeed Sensor On 280
2yy.xx Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job 279
2yy.xx paper jams 261
30.xx Invalid refill, change
cartridge 273
31.xx Replace defective
cartridge 273
32.xx Cartridge part number
unsupported by device 273
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] 273
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 273
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 274
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 274
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 273
38 Memory full 274
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 274
42.xy Cartridge region
mismatch 274
51 Defective flash detected 274
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 275
54 Network [x] software error 275
54 Serial option [x] error 275

54 Standard network software
error 275
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 275
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
loading 67
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 276
56 Serial port [x] disabled 276
56 Standard USB port disabled 276
56 USB port [x] disabled 276
57 Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored 276
58 Too many bins attached 276
58 Too many disks installed 277
58 Too many flash options
installed 277
58 Too many trays attached 277
59 Incompatible Duplex 277
59 Incompatible envelope
feeder 277
59 Incompatible output bin [x] 278
59 Incompatible tray [x] 278
61 Remove defective disk 278
62 Disk full 278
80 Routine maintenance 278
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 280
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 280
88 Cartridge low 279
88.xx Cartridge nearly low 278
88.xx Replace cartridge 279

A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 19
accessing the system board 27
Active NIC menu 159
adding a date and time stamp 106
address book, e‑mail
using 113
address book, fax
using 126
ADF
copying using 99

ADF feed roller cleaning cloth
ordering 237
ADF glass
cleaning 232
ADF parts
cleaning 232
adjusting copy quality 103
adjusting Sleep Mode 64
adjusting toner darkness 97
advanced options, touch‑screen
copy 109
AppleTalk menu 164
applications list
home screen 20
applications, home screen
Forms and Favorites 20
My MFP 20
Remote Operator Panel 20
Scan to Network 20
WS‑Scan 20
assigning a custom paper type
name 81
attaching cables 44
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
loading 77
available internal options 27
avoiding jams 85
avoiding paper jams 248

B
Bin Setup menu 156
blank pages 298
blocking junk faxes 128
business cards
loading 77
buttons, scanner control panel 13
buttons, touch screen 15

C
cables
Ethernet 44
USB 44
calling customer support 311
canceling
print job, from computer 98
canceling a print job
from a computer 98
from the scanner control panel 97

Index

canceling an e-mail 115
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 310
card stock
loading 73
tips on using 95
cartridges, print
ordering 238
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 262
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 262
Change [paper source] to [size] 263
Change [paper source] to [size]
[type] 263
charge rolls
ordering 239
Check duplex connection 263
Check tray [x] connection 263
checking an unresponsive
printer 280
checking an unresponsive
scanner 287
checking scanner status
on Embedded Web Server 246
checking scanner status using the
Embedded Web Server 246
checking status of supplies 237
checking the status of supplies 237
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 246
choosing a fax connection 119
cleaning
ADF glass 232
ADF parts 232
exterior of the scanner 231
scanner glass 231
cleaning kit
using 236
cleaning the touch screen 236
Close door or insert cartridge 264
Close finisher side door 264
collating copies 104
confidential print jobs 95
printing from a Macintosh
computer 96
printing from Windows 96
Confidential Print menu 174
configuration information
wireless network 48

329

configurations
printer 11
Configure MP menu 149
configuring e‑mail settings 111
configuring port settings 57
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 121
connecting the printer to
regional adapters 121
connecting to a DSL service 120
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 65
Eco‑Mode 63
Quiet Mode 63
Sleep Mode 64
conserving supplies 62
contacting customer support 311
control panel, scanner 13
copy quality
adjusting 103
copy screen
advanced options 109
options 107, 108, 110, 136
Copy Settings menu 186
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 284
partial document or photo
copies 286
poor copy quality 285
poor scanned image quality 288
scanner unit does not close 284
copying
adding a date and time stamp 106
adding an overlay message 106
adjusting quality 103
canceling a copy job 107
collating copies 104
custom job (job build) 105
different paper sizes 102
enlarging 103
multiple pages on one sheet 105
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 102
on letterhead 101
on transparencies 100
photos 100
placing separator sheets between
copies 104
quick copy 99
reducing 103
selecting a tray 101
to a different size 101

using the ADF 99
using the scanner glass 100
copying different paper sizes 102
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 105
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 102
copying on letterhead 101
copying on transparencies 100
copying photos 100
copying to a different size 101
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 123
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 133
creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 140
Custom Bin Names menu 155
custom job (job build) 105
Custom Names menu 154
custom paper type name
creating 81
Custom Scan Sizes menu 155
Custom Type [x]
changing name 81
Custom Types menu 154

D
date and time, fax
setting 122
daylight saving time,
configuring 123
daylight saving time, faxing 123
Default Source menu 144
different paper sizes, copying 102
directory list
printing 97
Disk corrupted 264
Disk full, scan job canceled 264
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk
space. 264
disk wiping 244
Disk Wiping menu 174
display troubleshooting
display is blank 281
display shows only diamonds 281
display, printer control panel
adjusting brightness 65
display, scanner control panel 13
disposing of scanner hard disk 242

Index

distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 121
documents, printing
from Macintosh 90
from Windows 90
drawers, paper
installing 43
removing 43
duplexing 102

E
Eco‑Mode setting 63
Edit Security Setups menu 172
Embedded Web Server
accessing 19
administrator settings 246
checking supplies 237
creating a fax destination
shortcut 123
creating an FTP shortcut 133
creating e‑mail shortcuts 112
initial fax setup 118
networking settings 246
problem accessing 310
setting up e‑mail alerts 246
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
where to find 246
emission notices 314, 317, 321, 322
enlarging a copy 103
Envelope Enhance 149
envelopes
loading 73, 76
tips on using 93
environmental settings 62
brightness, adjusting 65
Eco‑Mode 63
Quiet Mode 63
Sleep Mode 64
erasing hard disk memory 244
erasing non‑volatile memory 243
erasing volatile memory 243
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 265
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 54
Ethernet network setup
using Macintosh 55
using Windows 55
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 55

330

Windows 55
Ethernet port 44
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 54
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 22
exporting a configuration using the
Embedded Web Server 22
exterior of the scanner
cleaning 231
e‑mail
canceling 115
disabling 262
enabling 262
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 246
paper jam 246
setting up 246
e‑mail function
setting up 111
e‑mail screen
advanced options 117
options 115, 116, 117
E‑mail Settings menu 202
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 112
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 113
using the touch screen 113
e‑mailing
adding message line 114
adding subject line 114
changing output file type 114
configuring e‑mail settings 111
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 112
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 112
setting up e‑mail function 111
using a shortcut number 113
using the address book 113
using the touch screen 113

F
factory defaults
restoring 247
fax
disabling 262
enabling 262
sending 124

fax connection
connecting the scanner to the wall
jack 119
connecting to a DSL line 120
connecting to a PBX or ISDN 120
fax connections
regional adapters 121
fax log
viewing 128
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 190
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 199
fax screen
advanced options 130
options 129, 130
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 289
can receive but not send
faxes 291
can send but not receive
faxes 291
cannot send or receive a fax 289
received fax has poor print
quality 292
faxing
blocking junk faxes 128
canceling a fax job 128, 129
changing resolution 127
choosing a fax connection 119
configuring the scanner to observe
daylight saving time 123
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 123
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 123
distinctive ring service 121
fax setup 118
forwarding faxes 131
holding faxes 131
making a fax lighter or darker 127
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 127
sending using the touch
screen 124
setting the date and time 122
setting the fax number or station
number 122
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 122
using shortcuts 126
using the address book 126

Index

viewing a fax log 128
FCC notices 314, 318, 321
features
Scan Center 139
finding more information about the
scanner 9
finding scanner IP address 19
Finishing menu 219
firmware card
installing 23, 39
flash drive
printing from 91
Flash Drive menu 211
flash drives
supported file types 92
flash memory card
installing 39
font sample list
printing 96
Forms and Favorites 20
forwarding faxes 131
FTP
scanning using a shortcut
number 134
scanning using address book 135
scanning using the touch
screen 134
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 134
FTP screen
advanced options 137
options 135, 136, 137
FTP Settings menu 207
fuser
ordering 240
fuser wiper
ordering 240

G
General Settings menu 179
Green settings
Quiet Mode 63
green settings
Eco‑Mode 63
guidelines
card stock 95
envelopes 93
labels 94
letterhead 93
transparencies 93

331

H
held jobs 95
printing from a Macintosh
computer 96
printing from Windows 96
Help menu 229
hiding icons on the home screen 19
holding faxes 131
home screen
applications 20
hiding icons 19
showing icons 19
home screen applications
using 20
home screen buttons
description 14
HTML menu 228

I
If restarting job, replace originals
that have not begun to exit the
scanner 265
Image menu 229
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 22
importing a configuration using the
Embedded Web Server 22
indicator light is blinking
troubleshooting 262
initial fax setup 118
using the Embedded Web
Server 118
Insert staple cartridge 265
Install bin [x] 265
Install duplex 265
Install envelope feeder 266
Install MICR Cartridge 266
Install Tray [x] 266
installing a memory card 40
installing on a wireless network
using Windows 49
installing options
order of installation 42
installing printer software
adding options 47
installing scanner
on wireless network 49
installing scanner on a network
Ethernet networking 55

installing scanner on a wireless
network
using Macintosh 51
installing scanner software 46
internal print server
troubleshooting 295
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 57
troubleshooting 295
Internal Solutions Port (ISP)
installing 32
IP address, scanner
finding 19
IPv6 menu 163
isolating print quality problems 97

J
jams
avoiding 248
locating jam areas 248
locations 248
numbers 248
jams, clearing
200–201 paper jams 249
202–203 paper jams 250
230 paper jam 252
231–239 paper jams 254
24x paper jam 256
250 paper jam 257
260 paper jam 258
281 paper jam 259
283 paper jam 260
2yy.xx paper jams 261
Job Accounting menu 222
job interrupt 106

L
labels
tips on using 94
letterhead
copying on 101
loading, 2000‑sheet tray 70
loading, multipurpose feeder 73
loading, trays 67
tips on using 93
light, indicator
scanner control panel 13
linking trays 80
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 267

Index

Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 267
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 268
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 268
Load staples 268
loading
2000‑sheet tray 70
250‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 67
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 67
ADF 77
business cards 77
card stock 73
envelopes 73, 76
letterhead in 2000‑sheet tray 70
letterhead in multipurpose
feeder 73
letterhead in trays 67
multipurpose feeder 73
transparencies 73

M
maintenance kit
ordering 239
making copies using paper from
selected tray 101
memory
types installed on scanner 242
memory card
installing 40
menu settings page
printing 45
menus
Active NIC 159
AppleTalk 164
Bin Setup 156
Confidential Print 174
Configure MP 149
Copy Settings 186
Custom Bin Names 155
Custom Names 154
Custom Scan Sizes 155
Custom Types 154
Default Source 144
diagram of 143
Disk Wiping 174
Edit Security Setups 172
Envelope Enhance 149
E‑mail Settings 202

332

Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 190
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 199
Finishing 219
Flash Drive 211
FTP Settings 207
General Settings 179
Help 229
HTML 228
Image 229
IPv6 163
Job Accounting 222
Miscellaneous 173
Network [x] 159
Network Card 161
Network Reports 161
Paper Loading 153
Paper Size/Type 145
Paper Texture 150
Paper Weight 151
Parallel [x] 167
PCL Emul 225
PDF 224
PostScript 225
Quality 221
Reports 158
Security Audit Log 176
Serial [x] 169
Set Date/Time 178
Setup 217
SMTP Setup menu 171
Standard Network 159
Standard USB 165
Substitute Size 149
Supplies 144
TCP/IP 162
Universal Setup 156
Utilities 223
Wireless 164
XPS 224
menus diagram 143
messages
30.xx Invalid refill, change
cartridge 273
Miscellaneous menu 173
mobile device
printing from 90
moving the scanner 244
multifeed sensor
configuring 80
multiple paper feeds
detecting 80

multipurpose feeder
loading 73
My MFP 20

N
Network [x] menu 159
Network Card menu 161
network options 27
Network Reports menu 161
network setup page
printing 46
Networking Guide
where to find 246
noise emission levels 314
non‑volatile memory 242
erasing 243
notices 313, 314, 315, 316, 317,
318, 319, 320, 321, 322, 323

O
options
fax card 27
firmware card 23, 27, 39
flash memory card 39
Internal Solutions Port (ISP) 32
memory card 27
memory card, installing 40
network 27
paper drawers 43
ports 27
scanner communications card 23
updating in printer driver 47
options, touch‑screen
copy 107, 108, 110, 136
e‑mail 115, 116, 117
fax 129, 130
FTP 135, 136, 137
scan 140
scan to computer 140, 141
ordering
ADF feed roller cleaning cloth 237
charge rolls 239
fuser 240
fuser wiper 240
maintenance kit 239
pick rollers 240
print cartridges 238
separator pad 237
staple cartridges 240
transfer roll assembly 240

Index

output file type
changing 114
overlay message
adding 106

P
paper
characteristics 82
different sizes, copying 102
letterhead 83
preprinted forms 83
recycled 83
saving 105
selecting 83
storing 85
unacceptable 83
Universal size setting 80
using recycled 62
Paper changes needed 268
paper drawers
installing 43
removing 43
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 296
multiple pages feed into the
ADF 297
original documents misfeed in the
ADF 296
paper sticks to the scanner
glass 297
paper jams
avoiding 248
paper jams, clearing
200–201 paper jams 249
202–203 paper jams 250
230 paper jam 252
231–239 paper jams 254
24x paper jam 256
250 paper jam 257
260 paper jam 258
281 paper jam 259
2yy.xx paper jams 261
Paper Loading menu 153
paper size
setting 78, 79
Paper Size/Type menu 145
paper sizes, supported 85
Paper Texture menu 150
paper type
setting 78, 79

333

paper types
duplex support 88
supported by printer 88
where to load 88
Paper Weight menu 151
Parallel [x] menu 167
pausing a print job 106
PCL Emul menu 225
PDF menu 224
photos
copying 100
pick rollers
ordering 240
placing separator sheets between
copies 104
port settings
configuring 57
PostScript menu 225
preparing to set up the scanner on
an Ethernet network 54
print cartridges
ordering 238
print irregularities 302
print is too dark 303
print is too light 304
print job
canceling, from computer 98
print quality
cleaning the ADF glass 232
cleaning the ADF parts 232
cleaning the scanner glass 231
isolating problems 97
print quality troubleshooting
black streaks on a page 306
blank pages 298
characters have jagged edges 299
clipped images 299
gray background on prints 301
poor transparency print
quality 310
print irregularities 302
print is too dark 303
print is too light 304
repeating defects 305
shadow images appear on
prints 300
skewed print 305
solid color or black pages appear
on prints 306
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 307
streaked vertical lines 308

toner fog or background
shading 308
toner rubs off 309
toner specks 309
uneven print density 310
white streaks on a page 306
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 281
held jobs do not print 282
incorrect characters print 283
incorrect margins 301
jammed pages are not
reprinted 298
job prints from wrong tray 283
job prints on wrong paper 283
jobs do not print 281
Large jobs do not collate 284
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 281
paper curl 302
paper frequently jams 297
print job takes longer than
expected 282
tray linking does not work 283
unexpected page breaks 284
printer
configurations 11
minimum clearances 10
selecting a location 10
Printer and scanner not connected,
check connection and restart both
devices 268
printer configurations 11
printer control panel
adjusting brightness 65
factory defaults, restoring 247
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
emulation option 280
280.06 Paper missing 279
295.20 Multifeed Sensor On 280
2yy.xx Close flatbed cover and
load originals if restarting
job 279
31.xx Replace defective
cartridge 273
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[paper source] 273
35 Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature 273
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 274

Index

37 Insufficient memory, some
Held Jobs were deleted 274
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 273
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 274
42.xy Cartridge region
mismatch 274
51 Defective flash detected 274
52 Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources 275
54 Network [x] software error 275
54 Serial option [x] error 275
54 Standard network software
error 275
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 275
56 Parallel port [x] disabled 276
56 Serial port [x] disabled 276
56 Standard USB port
disabled 276
56 USB port [x] disabled 276
57 Configuration change, some
held jobs were not restored 276
58 Too many bins attached 276
58 Too many disks installed 277
58 Too many flash options
installed 277
58 Too many trays attached 277
59 Incompatible Duplex 277
59 Incompatible envelope
feeder 277
59 Incompatible output bin
[x] 278
59 Incompatible tray [x] 278
61 Remove defective disk 278
62 Disk full 278
80 Routine maintenance 278
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 280
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 280
88 Cartridge low 279
88.xx Cartridge nearly low 278
88.xx Replace cartridge 279
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 262
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 262
Change [paper source] to
[size] 263

334

Change [paper source] to [size]
[type] 263
Check duplex connection 263
Check tray [x] connection 263
Close door or insert cartridge 264
Close finisher side door 264
Disk corrupted 264
Disk full, scan job canceled 264
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 264
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 265
If restarting job, replace originals
that have not begun to exit the
scanner 265
Insert staple cartridge 265
Insert Tray [x] 265
Install bin [x] 265
Install duplex 265
Install envelope feeder 266
Install MICR Cartridge 266
Install Tray [x] 266
Load [src] with [custom
string] 267
Load [src] with [custom type
name] 266
Load [src] with [size] 267
Load [src] with [type] [size] 267
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 267
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 267
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 268
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 268
Load staples 268
Paper changes needed 268
Printer and scanner not
connected, check connection
and restart both devices 268
Reattach bin [x] 268
Reattach bin [x] – [y] 269
Reattach envelope feeder 269
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 270
Remove paper from [linked bin set
name] 270
Remove paper from all bins 270
Remove paper from bin [x] 270
Remove paper from standard
output bin 270

Replace all originals if restarting
job. 270
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 271
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 271
Replace pick roller 271
Replace separator pad 271
Replace wiper 271
Restore Held Jobs? 272
Scan document too long 272
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 272
Scanner locked, release lock under
scanner 272
Some held jobs were not
restored 272
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 272
Unsupported disk 272
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 264
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 265
printer options troubleshooting
2,000‑sheet drawer problems 294
option does not work 293
paper tray problems 294
printer problems, solving basic 280
printing
canceling, from the scanner
control panel 97
directory list 97
font sample list 96
from a mobile device 90
from flash drive 91
from Macintosh 90
from Windows 90
menu settings page 45
network setup page 46
print quality test pages 97
printing a directory list 97
printing a document 90
printing a font sample list 96
printing a menu settings page 45
printing a network setup page 46
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 96
from Windows 96
printing from a flash drive 91

Index

printing from a mobile device 90
printing print quality test pages 97
publications
where to find 9

Q
Quality menu 221

R
Reattach bin [x] 268
Reattach bin [x] – [y] 269
Reattach envelope feeder 269
recycled paper
using 62, 83
recycling
Lexmark packaging 66
Lexmark products 65
toner cartridges 66
reducing a copy 103
reducing scanner noise 63
Remote Operator Panel 20
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 270
Remove paper from [linked bin set
name] 270
Remove paper from all bins 270
Remove paper from bin [x] 270
Remove paper from standard
output bin 270
repeat print jobs 95
printing from a Macintosh
computer 96
printing from Windows 96
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 270
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 271
Replace last scanned page and
jammed originals if restarting
job. 271
Replace pick roller 271
Replace separator pad 271
Replace wiper 271
replacing the separator pad 241
reports
viewing 247
Reports menu 158
reserve print jobs 95
printing from a Macintosh
computer 96
printing from Windows 96

335

resolution, fax
changing 127
Restore Held Jobs? 272
restoring factory default
settings 247

S
safety information 7, 8
saving paper 105
Scan Center features 139
Scan document too long 272
scan profile
creating 138
scan screen
options 140
scan to computer
advanced options, setting 141
options 140, 141
original size 140
paper orientation, setting 141
Scan to Network 20
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 289
partial document or photo
scans 288
scan was not successful 287
scanner unit does not close 284
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 287
ScanBack Utility
using 140
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 12
functions 9
minimum clearances 10
moving 244
scanner glass 12
selecting a location 10
shipping 245
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 272
scanner communications card
installing 23
scanner control panel 13
scanner glass
cleaning 231
copying using 100
scanner hard disk
disposing of 242
wiping 244

scanner hard disk memory
erasing 244
scanner information
where to find 9
scanner IP address
finding 19
Scanner locked, release lock under
scanner 272
scanner messages
32.xx Cartridge part number
unsupported by device 273
38 Memory full 274
scanner options troubleshooting
internal print server 295
Internal Solutions Port 295
USB/parallel interface card 296
scanner software, installing 46
scanning
from a flash drive 139
to a computer 138
to an FTP address 134
to an FTP, using a shortcut
number 134
to an FTP, using address book 135
scanning to a computer 138
scanning to a flash drive 139
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 133
using shortcut numbers 134
using the address book 135
using the touch screen 134
Security Audit Log menu 176
selecting paper 83
sending a fax 124
sending a fax using shortcuts 125
sending a fax using the touch
screen 124
sending fax
using shortcuts 125
using the address book 125
sending fax at a scheduled
time 127
sending fax using the address
book 125
separator pad
replacing 241
separator roller
ordering 237
Serial [x] menu 169
serial printing
setting up 59

Index

Set Date/Time menu 178
setting
paper size for difficult media 78
paper type for difficult media 78
TCP/IP address 162
setting the ADF to detect multiple
paper feeds 80
setting the fax number or station
number 122
setting the outgoing fax name or
station name 122
setting the paper size for the
printer 79
setting the paper type for the
printer 79
setting the Universal paper size 80
setting up e‑mail alerts using the
Embedded Web Server 246
setting up serial printing 59
setting up the scanner
on an Ethernet network
(Macintosh only) 55
on an Ethernet network (Windows
only) 55
Setup menu 217
shadow images appear on
prints 300
shipping the scanner 245
shortcuts, creating
e‑mail 112
fax destination 123
FTP address 134
FTP destination 133
showing icons on the home
screen 19
Sleep Mode
adjusting 64
SMTP Setup menu 171
solid color or black pages appear on
prints 306
Some held jobs were not
restored 272
Standard Network menu 159
standard tray
loading 67
Standard USB menu 165
staple cartridges
ordering 240
staple jams, clearing
283 paper jam 260
statement of volatility 242

336

status of supplies
checking 237
storing
paper 85
supplies 236
storing print jobs 95
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 307
streaks appear on a page 306
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 114
Substitute Size menu 149
supplies
checking status 237
checking, from scanner control
panel 237
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 237
conserving 62
storing 236
using recycled paper 62
Supplies menu 144
supplies, ordering
charge rolls 239
cleaning cloth 237
fuser 240
fuser wiper 240
maintenance kit 239
pick rollers 240
print cartridges 238
separator pad 237
staple cartridges 240
transfer roll assembly 240
supported flash drives 92
supported paper sizes 85
supported paper types and
weights 88
system board
accessing 27

T
TCP/IP menu 162
telecommunication
notices 318, 319, 320
toner cartridges
recycling 66
toner darkness
adjusting 97
toner fog or background
shading 308
toner rubs off 309

touch screen
buttons 15
cleaning 236
transfer roll assembly
ordering 240
transparencies
copying on 100
loading 73
tips on using 93
transparency print quality is
poor 310
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 272
tray linking
assigning a custom paper type
name 81
tray unlinking
assigning a custom paper type
name 81
trays
linking 80
unlinking 81
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 293
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 310
checking an unresponsive
printer 280
checking an unresponsive
scanner 287
contacting customer support 311
indicator light is blinking 262
Scan to Network 293
solving basic printer
problems 280
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 284
partial document or photo
copies 286
poor copy quality 285
poor scanned image quality 288
scanner unit does not close 284
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 281
display shows only diamonds 281
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 289
can receive but not send
faxes 291
can send but not receive
faxes 291

Index

cannot send or receive a fax 289
received fax has poor print
quality 292
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 296
multiple pages feed into the
ADF 297
original documents misfeed in the
ADF 296
paper sticks to the scanner
glass 297
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 281
held jobs do not print 282
incorrect characters print 283
incorrect margins 301
jammed pages are not
reprinted 298
job prints from wrong tray 283
job prints on wrong paper 283
jobs do not print 281
Large jobs do not collate 284
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 281
paper curl 302
paper frequently jams 297
print job takes longer than
expected 282
tray linking does not work 283
unexpected page breaks 284
troubleshooting, print quality
black streaks on a page 306
blank pages 298
characters have jagged edges 299
clipped images 299
gray background on prints 301
poor transparency print
quality 310
print irregularities 302
print is too dark 303
print is too light 304
repeating defects 305
shadow images appear on
prints 300
skewed print 305
solid color or black pages appear
on prints 306
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 307
streaked vertical lines 308

337

toner fog or background
shading 308
toner rubs off 309
toner specks 309
uneven print density 310
white streaks on a page 306
troubleshooting, printer options
2,000‑sheet drawer problems 294
option does not work 293
paper tray problems 294
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 289
partial document or photo
scans 288
scan was not successful 287
scanner unit does not close 284
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 287
troubleshooting, scanner options
internal print server 295
Internal Solutions Port 295
USB/parallel interface card 296

U
understanding the home screen
buttons 14
uneven print density 310
unexpected page breaks 284
Universal Paper Size
setting 80
Universal Setup menu 156
unlinking trays 81
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 264
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 265
updating options in printer
driver 47
USB port 44
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 296
using Eco‑Mode 63
using Quiet Mode 63
using recycled paper 62
using shortcuts
sending fax 125
using the address book 113, 126
sending fax 125
using the ScanBack Utility 140
Utilities menu 223

V
verify print jobs 95
printing from a Macintosh
computer 96
printing from Windows 96
viewing
reports 247
viewing a fax log 128
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 246
volatile memory 242
erasing 243
volatility
statement of 242

W
wiping the scanner hard disk 244
Wireless menu 164
wireless network
configuration information 48
installation, using Macintosh 51
installation, using Windows 49
wireless network setup
in Windows 49
wireless scanner setup
in Macintosh 51
WS‑Scan 20

X
XPS menu 224

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Format                          : application/pdf
Description                     : 6500e
Title                           : User's Guide
Creator                         : Lexmark International, Inc.
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.2 (Windows)
Keywords                        : v15878040
Creator Tool                    : AH Formatter V5.3 MR1 (5,3,2011,0610) for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2012:11:27 15:17:19-05:00
Create Date                     : 2012:11:27 15:17:19-05:00
Document ID                     : uuid:687163ab-38a1-498d-ab2f-6adc2d8c66c6
Instance ID                     : uuid:cbf6d79b-dd11-4d31-90a2-c0e0dc990283
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 337
Author                          : Lexmark International, Inc.
Subject                         : 6500e

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lexmark 6500E Mfp Option Owner S Manual User's Guide

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation